JP6535305B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine has a function for providing an environment so that the player can play safely and with confidence, and plays against the player in order to prevent the player from forgetting to take a prepaid card etc. after the game is over. There are gaming machines that call attention to

JP, 2013-236674, A

However, the gaming machine may interrupt the flow of the game if alerting is performed regardless of the state of the game progress after the hit.
In one aspect, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that realizes alerting according to the progress of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, there is provided a gaming machine capable of deriving a hit in connection with a variable display of identification information as shown below. The gaming machine includes warning means and a control unit. The alerting means performs alerting about the game. The control unit makes it possible to call attention during the ending of the hit and during the change display of the identification information to be executed after the hit. Before the execution of the alert that will be executed during the end of the hit, the control unit ends the hit if there is a start memory that will lead the hit to the start memory held in the hit. It makes it possible to not performed together caution in variable display of caution and identification information to be executed after the per in. The alerting includes a first alert on prepaid card removal and a second alert on swallowing. The control unit performs the first alert and the second alert in parallel or in sequence.

  According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, alerting can be realized according to the progress of the game.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine of a first embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a second diagram showing a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the checksum calculation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the initial value random number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch read-in process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of payment command transmission processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fraud & prize monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning number counter update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a game machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the delivery busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening switch common process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual processing transfer setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation | variation start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process shift setting process (special figure 1) during the special figure fluctuation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process transfer setting process (special figure 2) during the special figure change of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during the special figure change of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing during special figure display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability change frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fanfare / during process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small shift fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process in the fanfare / interval in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing setting setting processing during big winning opening open of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing during a big winning opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big winning a prize opening residual ball processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big winning a prize opening remaining ball processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transfer setting process 2 in fanfare / during interval of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual processing transfer setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit fanfare middle process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hitting middle process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a small hit middle process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of small hit operation shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation | movement of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of small hit remaining ball process transfer setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of small hit residual ball processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit completion | finish process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual processing transfer setting process 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of symbol change control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the blink control timer initial value table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of 2 byte distribution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 図 figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the Puden prize winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of common drawing normal processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of common drawing normal processing transfer setting processing 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process transfer setting process in the common drawing fluctuation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process in the common drawing change of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process shift setting process in the common drawing display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing in the common drawing display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process shift setting process in the common drawing per 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process per common drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the common operation operation | movement shift setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the power conversion operation timing chart of the normal fluctuation prize-winning apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the charge remaining ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of end processing shift setting processing per common drawing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end processing per common drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of common drawing normal processing transfer setting processing 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of segment LED edit processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board | plate electric wave fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a second diagram showing the flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball | bowl signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit classification of the special figure game of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode for every ending classification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game mode effect display after completion | finish of a hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the company logo display after completion | finish of hitting of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting A display after the completion | finish of a hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting B display after the completion | finish of hitting of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game mode effect display with the decoration pattern after completion | finish of a hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game type | system | group command processing in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ending setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen without the alerting display in the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen with the alerting display in the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting process in the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting conditions of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting edit process in the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen with the alerting display by the message replacement in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen with the alerting display by the background replacement in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting edit process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen with the alerting display by the message replacement in the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting edit process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect used as the replacement object of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment, and the content of replacement. It is a figure which shows an example of the edit item choice at the time of alerting reset of the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment, and the edit item choice at the time of alerting set. It is a figure which shows the example of connection of the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment, and a push button. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of push button LED in the push button of 3rd Embodiment, and a touch sensor. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the display screen at the time of the option setting of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the display screen at the time of the option setting of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display and audio | voice output in the option setting of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen with a warning display at the time of the option setting in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen with the alerting setting at the time of the option setting in the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the welcome message setting process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the welcome message of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the privilege which the gaming machine of the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment provides to a player. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting aspect according to the alerting repetition number of modification 6 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting triggered by the detection of the game production intervention of the modification 7 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the background scroll display of the modification 8 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of penetration self-diagnosis of the modification 9 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting process in the presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting timing (alert alerting schedule) of 4th Embodiment, and an alerting time slot | zone (alert alerting schedule). It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting aspect of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the command at the time of RAM initialization of 5th Embodiment, and a command at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows an example of the change system command of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch change system command of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure game type | system | group command of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ending setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of an effect display edit setting process in the effect control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the rush game mode display of 6th Embodiment, alert A display, and alert B display. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of modification 2 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the display state transition after the end of the first big hit of the modification 3 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting timer count process of the modification 4 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table after the first time big hit of the modification 5 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the timing chart of the display state transition after the end of the first big hit of modification 5 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the timing chart of the display state transition after the end of the first big hit of modification 5 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting B1 display of the modification 5 of 6th Embodiment, and an example of the display screen in alerting B4 display. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st fluctuation pattern table after the first time big hit of the modification 6 of 6th Embodiment, and a 2nd fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ending setting process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 7 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production | presentation display edit setting process in the production control apparatus of the modification 7 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the timing chart of display state transition after the end of the first big hit of modification 7 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (2) which shows the timing chart of display state transition after the end of the first big hit of modification 7 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen under alerting C display of the modification 7 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ending setting process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 8 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen which displays attention during change display of modification 9 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen which displays attention during change display of modification 9 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen which displays attention during change display of modification 9 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) showing an example of the display screen which displays attention during change display of modification 9 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) showing an example of the display screen which displays attention during change display of modification 9 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting setting process of the modification 10 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ending setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ending setting process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
First Embodiment
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) are built in on the left and right of the glass frame 15 for decoration or presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, the lamp or LED is abnormal when a dispensing abnormality occurs) A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in a notification color (for example, red), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal contents are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage tray) 21 for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There is provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state in which the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device. Further, at the upper edge of the upper tray 21, an option setting unit 25 is provided for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a decision button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit for the player to set the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as an determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as a production button switch, the gaming machine 10 performs an operation in which the player's operation is performed based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. You can do For example, the effect of the player's operation being intervened is the effect in the variable display game (decorative special view variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is a display device The character to be displayed on the screen 41 can be moved, or the identification information in the decorative feature variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  Further, to the right of the option setting unit 25, the player operates the ball lending button 27, which is operated when the ball lending is received from the adjacent ball lending machine, and to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied with the game balls from the upper plate 21 in the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Also, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, and the brightness of the game board 30 can be set, for example. .

Next, the gaming board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 encloses the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward beyond the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that it is difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for an effect based on the progress of the game is displayed.

  In addition, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view variable display game is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the movable member 37b is always A closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize port or the like.
Furthermore, a special variation that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game on the lower side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and to the right of the start winning opening 36. A winning device (big winning opening) 38 is disposed.

  The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game It changes from the closed state (state disadvantageous to the player) with the big winning opening closed to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the state, the game ball is made easy to flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). It has become. The game ball that has won the special variation winning device 38 is detected by the special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is the right gaming area It is assumed. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning in the start winning opening 36 and fires the game ball to the right side game area (so-called It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by right-handing.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and to the right gaming area The game balls fired are configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 that make up the special view change display game are A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  The collective display unit 50 includes a round display unit 51 configured of an LED or the like, a special view 1 suspension display unit 52, a special view 1 symbol display unit 53, a special view 2 symbol display unit 54, and a common pattern symbol display unit 55, and a common drawing reserve display unit 56 and a state display unit 57.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. Between a central processing unit (CPU) unit 110 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It consists of data bus 140 grade.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and the operation clock and timer interrupts of the gaming microcomputer 111 and the reference of the random number generation circuit. And an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 400. And be made operational.

  The power supply device 400 generates an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, a DC-DC converter that generates lower DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from a voltage of 32 V DC And a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying generation and recovery.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, , And may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are provided on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and to reduce the cost.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. Control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply unit 410 and detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, to change the power failure monitoring signal and reset signal after a predetermined time. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only memory (ROM) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the special outcome mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state), at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed, This refers to a display state in which the display result derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the fluctuation display areas of left, middle and right (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the following order: "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. Control the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various Variation pattern random number to determine the run time etc. of the variation display game in reach display or non-reach variation display, random number generation circuit to generate a hit random number etc to determine the hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (ms)) to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. Have.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state Condition), the operation condition (time saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 as the current gaming condition, the number of starting memories, etc., any one fluctuation pattern table is selected from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control to pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the drawing start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal and converts it to a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, when the detection signal of start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, and an abnormality of a sensor or a switch are detected among the outputs of proximity I / F 121 The abnormality detection signal 1 output to the second input port 123 is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123 (changes to a valid level) Can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave improper signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of radio waves by a frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device). A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) And a first input port 122 for taking in a signal based on the above and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay substrate 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test emission test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay substrate 70 for output to the test emission test device. It is configured to In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the direct shot testing device via the relay substrate 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent the malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying special design symbol information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a notable authorized organization not shown via a relay board 70 An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied as they are to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The error signal indicating that control can not be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus. There is.

  The output unit 130 is also connected to the data bus 140 and has a large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the open / close door 38c of the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a common electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output the open / close data. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. Can be supplied to external devices. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives an open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal 138a. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12 V or 5 V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission and reception are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC) in the same manner as the gaming microcomputer 111 and a command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying an image on the display device 41. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for the purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound to reproduce various melodies, sound effects and the like from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 can be a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and holding stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor And processes such as drive control of solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used to expand or process image data such as an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data and characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address bus / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The voiced sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address bus / data bus 340. Even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and the effect role switch 47 for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. A function for detecting the on / off state of (rendering motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and detecting a state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the presentation control device 300 for detecting the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the circuit 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, DC voltage of 15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Also, it is supplied from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps and motors. And reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts the random determination value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in the table to determine the hit-off of the common-pattern variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the common symbol symbol display unit 55, processing is performed to display the common pattern variation display game to be stopped and displayed. If the result of this common view variation display game is a hit, while displaying the special result aspect corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol on the common symbol symbol display section 55, the common current solenoid 37c Is controlled to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 functions as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing symbol display unit 55.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting storage, the first special view fluctuation display game The jackpot determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit of the first special view variation display game. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 stores the starting memory, based on this starting memory, for the big hit determination of the second special view fluctuation display game The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (rendering control command) including the determination result of the first special view variation display game or the second special view variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a special view variation display game is displayed to be stopped and displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 forms game control means for controlling the progress of the fluctuation display game based on winning in the start winning area (start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. .

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the effect state, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 has a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54. While displaying the special game state and the small hit game state (that is, the process of executing the special game and the small hit game). In the processing to generate the special game state and the small hit game state, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the opening and closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and can flow the gaming ball into the big winning opening. To control. Then, the special winning opening until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display the result of the deviation on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the high probability state as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Also, the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view game, regardless of which special view fluctuation display game of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game is a high probability state. Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state, common figure high probability state) as a gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common view variation display game (general view change time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common view stop time for displaying the result of the common view change display game is, for example, 600 ms. When the game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 being released, the opening time (the time for general electric power release) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of times open (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stop symbol (general time open time) and the number of openings (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set so as to control the common drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (E.g., 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power open time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting modes of LED_00 to LED_31.

  The batch display device 50 distributes the various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, thereby displaying the round display unit 51, the special view 1 suspension display unit 52, the special view 1 symbol display unit 53, and the special view 2 symbol display unit 54. , A common-design symbol display unit 55, a common-model suspension display unit 56, and a state display unit 57. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special view game by lighting modes of four LEDs of LED_00 to LED_03. The special view 1 suspension display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special view 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by lighting modes of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. Special figure 2 symbol indicatory department 54 indicates the design in the special figure 2 game with the lighting feature of eight LEDs of LED 14 to LED 21. The common-design symbol display unit 55 displays the symbols in the common-play game by lighting modes of the four LEDs of LED_24 to LED_27. The common drawing reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the common drawing game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs of the LED_28 and the LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the gaming state in the special view game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs of the LED_30 and the LED_31. The special view 2 suspension display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special view 2 game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_22 and LED_23.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for the program to start properly is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer counts time using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of validity determination (check sum calculation) of data held in the RAM region. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting of the standby time or the RAM initialization switch is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations, and the operation of initialization performed at the time of turning on the power It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  Next, after performing processing (step S7) for setting a power on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds), processing for monitoring standby time and monitoring occurrence of power failure during standby time (steps S8 to S12) Do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S8), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on or not A determination is made (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine 10 to be shut off. . As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure occurs, the power on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. It is determined whether it is "" (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of the read / write readable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is given (step S13) The off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 has been turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (step S16).

  If the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16) S17), if normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the blackout inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and the processing in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

  In addition, it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N) And if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, RAM initialization switch 112 is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and game control device 100 initializes data stored in RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Form a means of

  In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area related to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether or not it is in the high probability of the special view (the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state) (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. Further, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error display provided in the collective display device 50, for example) Device) on (lit) in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25), step S31 Go to In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, Otherwise, it sends multiple commands such as recovery screen commands. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S16, S17, S18, or S20 to step S26, the RAM access inhibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization (a customer demo screen is displayed and A plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

  In step S31, processing for activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and to improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the special symbol is determined RWM as the initial value (start value) of a random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), a random number that determines the hit of the common drawing (random number), a random number that determines the hit symbol of the common drawing (contact random number)) After saving in the predetermined area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers (start value By doing this, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, initial value random number update processing (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number is a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value change method to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random type update in which all values within the range appear separately without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, 2) for checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and the data bus and checking is set (step S36) It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check (loop process) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step S35 is In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. As in the embodiment, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting the off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in a checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be determined at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. And the like), the main control means is a standby means (game control for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device by delaying the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on). The apparatus 100) and the power failure monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of the power failure in the predetermined standby time are provided.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) operates the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operating unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of external operation, and the initialization operation unit. Based on the above, initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of RAM being used. Next, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S103).

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether or not the calculation of the checksum is completed (step S107). When the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the initial value random number updating process of the first embodiment. This initial value random number updating process is the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is "+1" Then, the symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is ended. Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of random number that determines big hit stop symbol of special figure, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is random number that determines small hit stop symbol of special figure It is a random number that becomes the initial value of. In addition, "the initial value random value per hit" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common pattern variation game, and "the initial value random symbol per pattern" is the initial value for the random number that determines the hit symbol for the common pattern variation game It is a random number that becomes In addition, small hit design random numbers do not exist in models without small hits, and there may be cases in which a hit initial symbol random number does not exist depending on the model. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing in the above-described main processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process which occurs in the above-described main process from the time when the interrupt permission is issued until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, the input from various sensors and switches, and the taking in of signals, that is, the input processing (step S123) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S124) is performed to perform drive control and the like of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, common electric solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the payout control device 200. Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when the two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are allowed to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S126), and a random number update process 2 (step S127) are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a of common drawing, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, monitoring of error ( A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) is performed to determine whether the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are open. Further, special figure game processing (step S129) for performing processing relating to the special figure variation display game and general drawing game processing (step S130) for performing processing relating to the common drawing variation display game are performed.

  Next, segment LED editing processing (step S131) provided in the gaming machine 10 and driving the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S131) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) are interrupts. It is performed automatically at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S123) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of input processing of the first embodiment.

  In this input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the read input port 1 state is saved (stored) in switch control area 1 in RWM (step S142) S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and unused bit data is prepared (step S145) S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and a switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, “prepare” in the first embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and unused bit data is prepared ( Step S151), preparing bit data to be inverted (step S152). Then, the switch reading process (step S153) is performed, and the input process is ended.

  As switches to be monitored by the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, a glass frame open detection switch 63, a main body frame open detection switch 64, and a RAM initialization switch 112 (unused in this process), There are a power failure monitoring signal (unused in this process) generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400, a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. As switches to be monitored by the second input port 123, the starting opening 1 switch 36a ("starting opening 1 winning signal"), the starting opening 2 switch 37a (by pattern branching, "starting opening 2 winning signal" "normal motorized role 1 Output as winning signal 1 "), winning opening switch 35a (" normal winning opening winning signal "), special winning opening switch 38a (" special electric character 1 winning signal ") and gate switch 34a (" normal symbol 1 related to There is a gate passing signal 1 "). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a board radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave improper signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of switch reading processing according to the first embodiment. In the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S162), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S164). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (about 100 μs) to the second reading to elapse (step S165).

  When the delay time (about 100 μs) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S167), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S169). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit in the other is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S170), and the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed this time The decision bit is set (step S171).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the state is 0 and the other bit is 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S172), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently decided bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S174), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S175). End the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading changes the signal by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the second output port 134 for outputting the data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S182).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by “+1” in the range of “0” to “3” (step S183), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter The output data of the line is acquired (step S184). Here, as an example of turning on LED_31 from LED_00 of collective display device 50 dynamically, round display, special view 1 hold display, special view 1 symbol display, special view 2 symbol display, common figure symbol display, common view hold display, and There is a state display (playing state display such as time saving state or high probability state).

  Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is "door / frame open" and "security signal".

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). Here, as external information to be synthesized, "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "design fixed number signal", "start opening signal", "main prize ball" Signal etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the release permission are combined (step S190), and the combined data are output to the fifth output port 137 for the external information output and the release permission signal output (step S191).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S192). Thereafter, data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S193).

  Next, the data output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S194). Furthermore, the data output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( Step S195). Then, the data output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S196), and the output process is finished.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of payout command transmission processing according to the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is processing for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the right column is processing for transmitting a payout command.

  In the payout command transmission process, first, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for the number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls), each is selected as a check target. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 2 which stores up to 255 winnings (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

  If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted ("-1" is updated) (step S204). The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining prize ball area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining prize ball area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208) It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211). Here, as the winning ball signal (main winning ball signal), one pulse is outputted from the main substrate (game control device 100) for every 10 pieces of payout schedule, and 10 pieces are dispensed from the payout substrate (disbursement control device 200). One pulse is output each time.

  Next, in the determination in step S203, it is determined that all the checks have ended (step S203; Y), or in the determination in step S209, the subtraction result is determined not to be “0” or more (step S209; N) In the case where the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” because the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set. From that, no subtraction will be done. As described above, the payout command is not sent for each timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control substrate side can pay out the winning balls.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, as a condition for the payout busy signal to be on (busy), "diverting operation", "ball lending operation", "shooting ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave illegal occurrence" "Medium", "due to a drop of ball detection switch (switch to monitor dispensed balls)", "due to underdelivery error", "due to overdelivery error", "a prize to be dispensed in the memory of the dispensing control board When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) or the like.

  Next, if the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). N) Update the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (step S216), and determine whether the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all the areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, when there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by “−1” (step S218), and the payout number corresponding to the address of winning number counter area 1 A command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y) If it is determined in step S217 that all areas have been checked (step S217; Y), or if the process of step S221 is completed, the payout command transmission process is ended.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, random number updating process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number updating process 1 according to the first embodiment. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update processing.

  In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S231). If the big hit symbol random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). Also, when the big hit symbol random number of the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), the next big hit symbol random number of the common drawing loaded Is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

  If the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the hitting random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number Are set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the random number is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S237).

  If the hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S 237; N), it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S 240). If the random number is waiting for setting the initial value (step S 237; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S 238), and the next initial value of the loaded random number corresponds to the random number counter ( The start value of the random number area is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value (step S239). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S240).

  If the hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, when the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the next symbol initial value is loaded with the initial symbol random number (step S241), and the loaded initial symbol random number corresponds to the next initial value. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value (step S 242), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, random number updating process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number updating process 2 according to the first embodiment. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random number update processing 2 As an update target, and switches and processes the update target each time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying which one of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is “0” to “3”. The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred based on the calculated address (step S253). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, for example, a random counter such as a counter (hereinafter, referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing or the like of a DRAM provided in a Z80-based microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter for which the value is set is loaded (step S254). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value as the added value (hereinafter referred to as mask) Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the above-mentioned value), and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 257), and the process proceeds to step S 259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), Shift to step S259. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set The process proceeds to step S262) and step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 byte) Are set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

  In step S262, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S253. (Step S263). Then, if the new random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S263; N), the new random number is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S263; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is regarded as a new random number again (step S264). It saves in the lower random number area of the random number or 2-byte random number (step S265).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), the new random number value (if a new random number is calculated again, it is saved) in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S267) , And the random number updating process 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, CPU 111A determines the fluctuation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure fluctuation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37. It is a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input corresponding to the special winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) And the data indicating the bit position of the signal in the port etc. is stored (step S 271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is performed to monitor whether there is an injustice (illegal prize) for winning in the big prize mouth despite the fact that the big prize mouth is not open. .

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning or not and a normal winning is achieved. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S274) to detect is performed. Then, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step S275), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process ( Step S276) is executed.

  Next, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) for which the fraud monitoring process is unnecessary is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. A number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for designating in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals to monitor the error state of the gaming machine 10 is to be the target of this monitoring is "0". To "3" (step S279). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the dispensing abnormality error A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting a target of error monitoring based on the parameter (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

  Next, according to the value of the status scan counter, prepare the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring of the error based on the glass frame open, the main body frame open, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284). If the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitor End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine status on the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine status is based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S286) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and since the remaining three times are passed, monitoring of a cycle of 16 ms is performed.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a view showing a flowchart of the fraud & prize monitoring process of the first embodiment. In addition, in each winning opening monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, “data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)”, “lower address of fraud monitoring information”, “unfair winning prize” The lower address of the number area, "illegal prize error notification command", "illegal prize number upper limit value (incorrect determination judgment number)", "address of winning opening switch table" and "notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that information is defined.

  The fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on the special winning opening switch 38 a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a of the normal variation winning device 37. The detection of winnings is made easily for the large winnings opening (special variation winning device 38) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 37) because the opening / closing member is forcibly opened to insert the game ball and the prize ball is paid out. In addition to the monitoring of fraud.

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the large winning hole switch 38a. When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S293). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). In addition, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the number of incorrect winnings after the addition is the number of fraud targets determined for monitoring ( For example, it is determined whether or not five or more (step S 295).

  It should be noted that the determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening and the gaming ball is the valid period of the count switch If you win a prize or you get a noise on the signal, it is not immediately decided that it is incorrect. In this way, it is possible to prevent easy determination of fraud unless it is necessarily fraudulent.

  Then, if it is not the determined number or more (step S295; N), the prize monitoring table of the target prize hole switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is not less than the determined number (step S295; Y), the number of incorrect winnings is fixed to the number of determined frauds (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target incorrect winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraudulent command is prepared (step S 298), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S 299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the targeted fraud flag area (step S 310). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), the prize monitoring table of the target prize opening switch is prepared (step S300), and a prize number counter updating process (step S301) for setting a prize ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step S303). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process ends. In addition, there is a special winning opening switch 38a as information for which updating of the notification timer is not permitted. This is because two switches monitor one big winning opening. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer will be updated at double speed, and as a result, the unauthorized timer will time out in half of the specified time. In order to avoid such timer update, the update at the timing of the big winning opening switch which performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. In addition, when the update of the notification timer is permitted as with the special winning opening switch that performs monitoring processing and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37 (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is "0". If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to “0”.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is one of the large winning opening switches 38a, and the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is the other large winning opening switch 38a. Is not allowed. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the incorrect notification about the special variation winning device 38, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the large winning opening switch 38a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305). If the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, time is not up, fraud & prize monitoring End the process. If the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has been up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S306), and set the fraud recovery flag as a fraud flag. (Step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of target fraud wins is It clears (step S309), and compares the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310).

  When the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S311), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step S311) Step S312) The fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. By the above processing, the informing notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the occurrence of the injustice, and the ineffective prize unfair cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the cancellation of the injustice, and the start and end of the informing notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
Next, winning number counter update processing (steps S278 and S301) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning number counter update processing of the first embodiment. The winning table in the winning opening monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes information on the "number of repetitions" and data defined as "input is defined or not defined for each switch. Information of (monitoring switch bit), "lower address of winning number counter area 1", and "lower address of winning number counter area 2" are defined.

  In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 321), and whether or not there is an input (accurate input change) in the target winning opening switch. It is determined (step S322).

  If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether it overflows. (Step S325). Then, when the overflow does not occur (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning number counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range of “0” to “65535”. If an overflow occurs (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

  Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 327), the loaded value is updated by “+1” (step S 328), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs (step S 329). If no overflow occurs (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). As a result, the winning number counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range of “0” to “255”. If an overflow occurs (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is passed.

  In step S331, when the table address is updated to the address of the next record, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332). If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S332; N), the process returns to the process (step S322) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. Further, when the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. By the above processing, a winning ball according to the winning is set.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S286) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 20 is a view showing a flowchart of gaming machine state check processing of the first embodiment. It should be noted that in each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, “a lower address of the top address of the status monitoring area”, and “a port of a switch control area where target signal information is stored. Lower address of input state area, "mask data for extracting only bits of target signal", "determination data for signal on", "state off command (in case of error system, meaning of command of error notification end)", Information of “state on command (in the case of an error system, meaning of a command of error notification start command)”, “state off monitoring timer comparison value” and “state on monitoring timer comparison value” are respectively defined.

  In this gaming machine status check process, first, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is obtained (step S341), and whether or not the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether it is a status indicating an error or not It determines (step S342). The case where the signal to be monitored is not on refers to a normal state that is not an error with respect to an error system, and refers to a state in which a touch switch is not touched. Further, the case where the signal to be monitored is on means an error (abnormal, incorrect) state regarding an error system, and means a touch state regarding a touch switch.

  In step S342, when the signal is not on (step S342; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). Thereafter, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  On the other hand, if the signal is on (step S342; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S347). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S 349; Y), that is, if the signal state does not change, the target state monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S 352) ), It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S 349; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S 351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S 352), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the target state monitoring timer becomes equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and remains at the value of “comparison value −1” (step S354). And the prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S355).

  Then, if the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), the gaming machine state check process is ended. If the prepared status flag does not match the value of the targeted status flag area (step S355; N), the prepared status flag is saved in the targeted status flag area (step S356), and the status prepared above is off. A rendering command setting process for transmitting either a command or a state on command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine state check process is ended.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of payout busy signal check processing of the first embodiment.

  In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S 361). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S 361; N), an idle status flag is prepared as a status flag ( Step S362) The off determination monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value set here.

  If it is determined in step S361 that the payout busy signal is on (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the ON determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

  Next, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the current signal state (step S366). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S366; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S369), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the timer comparison value (step S370). If the value of the busy signal state area and the state of the current signal do not match (step S 366; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area ( Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

  If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), the payout busy signal check process is ended. If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and remains at the value of “comparison value −1” (step S371) The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special view game process (step S129) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed. In the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 making the first starting winning opening and the normal variation winning device 37 making the second starting winning opening, extraction of various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) The game result pre-determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize.

  Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball in the special winning opening switch 38a (big winning opening switch 1, large winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game process number (step A7).

  At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation Special figure processing (step A8) is performed to set information required to perform processing.

  At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern and to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process.

  At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.

  At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information required to perform ball processing.

  If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / in-interval processing, etc., the final round is performed. A process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and a special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information required to perform the big hit end process are performed.

At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "6", a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.

  In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit medium movement transition processing, the command of the small hit end screen, the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit middle process (step A16) to be performed is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing small hit end processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", a small hit end process (step A18) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display), and when the condition device is activated, a big hit condition occurs, for example, and it is a special special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a starting opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

  In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) preparation of the prize monitoring table (step A101), hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, is there a winning of the starting opening 1? It is determined whether or not it is (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the starting opening 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104) . It should be noted that the determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is under normal power support, and does not include high and low in the probability state as the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is the time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, the right-handed instruction notifying command is prepared (step A105), and the rendering command setting process (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player hits the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) to the left, and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 if the player does not hit the right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but when there is a winning on the starting opening 1 in the time saving state (that is, when left hit in the time saving state) Is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing the right-handling operation by the effect control device 300.

  Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special view starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

  Next, the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared for the prize monitoring table (step A109), hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), the normal electric winning combination (normal variation winning device 37) is in operation, ie, normal variation winning It is determined whether or not the apparatus 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which winning of a game ball is possible (step A112), and when it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), step A114. Then, the process is performed after that. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the common electrical program is in progress, it is determined that the injustice is occurring if the number of unfair prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of injustices (for example, 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A114), the special drawing The starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the winning no information of the starting opening to be monitored is set among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) (step A121). It is determined whether there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. .

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view starting opening switch common processing of the first embodiment.

The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a.
In the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is sent to the management apparatus outside the gaming machine 10. The start opening signal output number which is the output number is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, the value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit Step A135). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends. If the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the to-be-updated special figure number (to special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) by +1 Step A136) Save the starting opening winning flag to be monitored (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning on the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that it is not a winning on the starting opening 1 (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the winning opening for the starting opening 1 is determined (step A142; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A143), small hit symbols random numbers of RWM. Save to storage area (step A 144).

  Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure holding information determination process (step A146) is performed.

  Next, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special view reservation number (step A147), perform rendering command setting processing (step A148), and execute the special drawing start opening switch common processing. finish.

  Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special view changing display game A start winning memory storing means is provided which stores a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory which becomes an execution right of the above. In addition, the start winning memory storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) as a first start memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Various random number values extracted based on the winning of the gaming ball to the mouth 2 (normal variation winning device 37) are stored as a second start memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described using FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special-image hold information determination process of the first embodiment.

  The special view reserve information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

  In the special view reservation information determination process, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A 137 is checked to determine whether it is a winning on starting opening 1 (starting opening 36) (step A 151).

If it is determined in step A151 that it is not a winning to the starting opening 1 (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening for the starting opening 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step A153; Y), the special map reservation information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A 155). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A156), and correspond to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not it is a winning to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that it is not a winning to the starting opening 1 (step A158; N), stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164, and thereafter Perform the processing of

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning opening for the starting opening 1 has been won (step A158; Y), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Small hit determination processing (step A159) for determining

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the small hitting determination processing is a small hit (step A160). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 It acquires (step A162), proceeds to the process of step A164, and performs the subsequent processes.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing (step A165) is performed. Next, a special pattern information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game. Do.

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A168), and the rendering command setting process (step A168) A169) is performed, and the special-image hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the starting memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or the change pattern type) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Judgment) Makes prior judgment means It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the starting winning combination when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether it is a special gaming state (step A201). If the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205, and the subsequent processes are performed. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening residual ball processing is being performed (step A202).

  If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not small hit middle (small hit gaming state) processing is being executed (step A203).

  When the small hitting medium is being processed (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hitting medium is not being processed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the small hitting residual ball processing is being performed (step A204).

  If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If small ball remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.

  In addition, since the special figure game processing number does not shift the value of the special figure game processing number until the special figure game processing timer becomes "0", the progress state of the game by checking the value of the special figure game processing number You can check Therefore, during the special winning opening open processing, during the special winning opening residual ball processing, during the small hit during processing, and during the small hit residual ball processing, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked. Do.

  Then, set "0" in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening added in the special winning opening switch monitoring process this time (step A205). Is determined (step A206).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210, and the subsequent processing is performed. If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), prepare a special winning opening count command (step A207), perform the effect command setting process (step A208), the value of the winning counter " "+1" is updated (step A209).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210), and when there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. Perform the subsequent processing. If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), prepare a special winning opening count command (step A211), perform the effect command setting process (step A212), the value of the winning counter " "+1" is updated (step A213).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214). If the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A215), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A215) In step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  If the big winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), it is determined whether the small hit residual ball processing is in progress (step A216). If the small hit residual ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y) ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  If small ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A 216; N), the value of the winning counter (“1” or “2”) is added to the large winning opening count number (step A 217), and the large winning opening count number is It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) or more is reached (step A218).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information on the special figure game processing timer area is zero cleared (step A220). ), It is determined whether the small hit is being processed (step A221).

  When the small hitting medium is not being processed (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the small hit is being processed (step A221; Y), the value of the small hit open operation end is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special view routine process (step A8) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view ordinary processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special view routine processing, first, it is determined whether the number of special view 2 reservations (the second start storage number) is "0" (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserve number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reserve number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo is not started (Step A311; N) sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), rendering command setting processing (step A314) is performed, special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and special processing normal processing is ended. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has been started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

  Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special drawing corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number A number-of-holds command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing 2 of special drawing 2 is performed (step A305), and the special drawing processing is ended.

  Also, if the special drawing 1 reservation number is not "0" in step A306 (step A306; N), the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special drawing corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number A number-of-holds command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing in special drawing 1 (step A310) is performed, and the special processing usually ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed when the special figure 2 pending number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 pending number prior to the special figure 1 pending number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special view routine processing transition setting process 1 (step A 315) in the special view routine processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number "0" which is related to special processing ordinary processing is set as a processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing game processing number area (step A322).

  Then, clear the information of the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A323), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the big prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag region (step A324), and finish the special processing transition processing setting process 1 Do.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) in the special view normal process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331). A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. Information setting processing (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process is set for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) in the special view normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view 2 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game, is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A 351), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A 353), information of the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) "0" is cleared (step A354). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). After that, the big hit judgment processing (step A355) which decides whether or not it is a big hit depending on whether the prepared big hit random number value agrees with the big hit judgment value is performed, and the judgment result of the big hit judgment processing is a big hit It is determined whether or not (step SA356).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information was saved in step A352 (step A357) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not The small hit determination process (step A 358) for determining the small hit is performed, and it is determined whether the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA 359).

  Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is a small hit (step A 359; Y), the small hit information is saved by overwriting the small hit information in the small hit flag area saved with the out information in step A 351 (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is not the small hit (step A 359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “detachment”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A 342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and information of the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is prepared. "0" is cleared (step A373). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value, and the big hit determination process (step A374). It is determined whether or not (step SA375).

  If the determination result in the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the out information was saved in step A 371 (step A 376) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is one of “big hit” and “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (steps A154, A355, and A374) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process will be described using FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot determination process according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a drop, "other than a big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A 382; Y) Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability (probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability state) (step A 383) .

  Then, if high probability is in progress (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value ( Step A 386). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386).

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), Since it is a hit or a drop, "other than big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), it is an off As the determination result, "other than big hit (out)" is set (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (steps A 159 and A 358) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hitting determination process of the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hitting determination process, first, the small hitting lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hitting lower judgment value (step A391). In addition, small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value It determines (step A392).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a disconnection, a gap is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (1) Load the jackpot symbol random number from (1) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A 407), the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode is shifted with a hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode, which is shifted after the end of the hit, changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, if it becomes a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the big hit in the special figure 1, depending on whether or not the game state is in a definite change, the transition destination's effect mode will be a definite change definite It is determined whether to shift to a rendering mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the rendering mode is a definite variation or not. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A 401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 410). If it is a small hit (step A 410; Y), special feature 1 A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).

  Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A421), and clear the information of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) to "0" (step A422) Clear the information of the special figure 1 small hitting symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) to "0" (step A423), and finish the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special view 2 change start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In special figure 2 stop design setting processing, first, it decides whether or not big hit flag 2 is big hit (step A431), when it is big hit (step A431; Y), special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ( The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the number of reservations 1) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 437), and the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, regardless of any big hit symbol, it becomes a dedicated effect mode in which the effect mode of the transfer destination becomes the definite variation determination. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 441). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and a rendering command setting process (step A444) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information of the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446) ), Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36), and the starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37). The variable display game execution means is configured to execute a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Further, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control apparatus 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 variation start process, and special view information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special view 2 variation start process will be described using FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special drawing information setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with or without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the change, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the change. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, and the like.

  In the special view information setting process, first, the former half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the former half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

  Then, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

  Next, the former half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Then, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

  Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

  Then, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start process (steps A167, A336, A346) will be described using FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of fluctuation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  In the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the fluctuation pattern of interest is obtained. The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A 473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure from the one for winning and the one for losing. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out (step A 474). If it is out (step A 474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step A 475) is performed and the step is performed. The processing shifts to A477, and the subsequent processing is performed. If not (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A 477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1), Prepare (step A 478). Then, distribution processing (step A479) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A480). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A 481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A 482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). To do (step A 484). Thereafter, distribution processing (step A485) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step A486), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A 337 and A 347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the change start information setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the change start information setting process, first, the information of the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 497). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A 498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A 499), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step A 500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by “−1” (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the free space after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, information about the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure variation in progress processing transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing for transition to special processing during transition setting processing (special drawing 1) according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, the process number "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A511), and the special figure game process number area is processed Save the number (step A512).

  Then, the information on the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). In addition, the signal regarding the fluctuation | variation start of the special figure 1 is a signal which turns on the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation. After that, save the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (timer of the blinking cycle of special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A 516), and the process of setting the processing transition during special drawing (special drawing 1) is ended.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure during fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A 305) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing for transition to special processing during transition setting processing (special drawing 2) according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure variation process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, the process number “1” related to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A 521), and the special figure game process number area is processed Save the number (step A522).

  Then, the information on the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54) Are saved (set) (step A526), and the special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 2) is ended.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In addition, in the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern by the removal symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

  Next, the processing for setting transition to special processing is set (step A603), and the processing to display special drawing is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
Next, the details of the processing for transition to processing during special processing display in the above processing for special processing during fluctuation (step A603) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing during a special figure display of the first embodiment.

  In the special processing display processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number "2" relating to the processing during the special processing display is set as the processing number (step A611), and the processing number is saved in the special processing game processing number area ( Step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and a signal related to the end of fluctuation in the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation. Moreover, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation.

  Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for output in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area Step A 616), save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game in the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 Then (step A617), the processing transition setting processing during special image display is ended.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described using FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of processing during special view display according to the first embodiment; FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special view display in the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701), and the information of the small hit flag area of RWM is cleared ( Step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) The information on the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is judged whether or not the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2) The signal regarding the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A 709). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the signal which turns on the signal during condition device operation, the signal which turns on the character continuous operation device operation signal, and the signal which turns on the special symbol 2 signal. Including.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706). (Step A706; Y) saves the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), round A number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal to turn on the signal during the condition device operation, a signal to turn on the item continuous action device operation, and a signal to turn the signal per special symbol 1 Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit (“16” or “4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, It saves in the round number upper limit value area of RWM (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716) Do A717).

  Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A 718, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is on when there is a big hit with popped out (big winning opening open information is other than the big winning opening open information 1), a big hit without popping out (so-called, sudden certain big hit etc. big winning opening open If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, it will be off otherwise. Also, the jackpot 3 signal is on when the jackpot is a jackpot with a ball, and is off when the jackpot is a jackpot without a ball.

  After that, set the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game. (Step A719) The set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

  Then, clear the information of the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (special variation winning a prize device 38) corresponding to the special winning a prize opening information (step A722), of the special winning a prize opening corresponding to the special winning a prize opening information. An out-of-fair monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening unfair monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

  If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), the high probability change number updating process (step A 726), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 727) To determine whether or not the special figure height probability is in progress (the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state) (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing height probability is not in progress (step A728; N), the decorative special drawing command is loaded from the decorative special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), rendering command setting processing (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure height probability is in progress (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed. Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special view variation display game is the high probability state, the occurrence of the small hit opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of the small hit In order to prevent the player from being aware of this, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), the high probability change number updating process (step A 735), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the rendering mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the rendering remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738). The switch preparation remaining rotational speed is a different value in all the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes (rotational speed: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.) It may be the same value (number of rotations) in any of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value (number of rotations in all of the plurality of effect modes) ) May be.

  When it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A 738; N), special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 741) is performed, and special drawing display Finish the middle process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A 739). After the processing (step A 740) is performed, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 (step A 741) is performed, and the processing of displaying the special drawing is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation count updating process (steps A 726 and A 735) in the special view display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the high probability variation count updating process according to the first embodiment.

  In the high probability change number updating process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751), and when the special figure high probability is not in progress (step A751; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process Finish.

  If the special figure height probability is in progress (step A 751: Y), the high probability fluctuation number of managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by “−1” (step A 752). It is determined whether the probability variation count is “0” (step A 753).

  If the high probability fluctuation number is not "0" (step A753; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. If the number of times of high probability change is "0" (step A753; Y), the information on the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and the signal related to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Step A 755). Note that the signal related to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time (high probability & short or no high probability & short) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). In addition, the signal about the end of the high probability & time short is the signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal off A signal to turn on, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Further, even in the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the common drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric utility 1 open extension state signal are always off.

Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A757), and the common drawing low probability flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal relating to the left-handed command is a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the display LED in the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 761), and the high probability change frequency update process is ended.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the special view display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect mode information check processing of the first embodiment.

  In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is the no update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is the no update code (step A771; Y), The presentation mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and, for example, the effect mode to continue until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected, etc. It is.

  If the next mode transition information is not the no update code (step A 771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by “−1” (step A 772). ), It is determined whether or not the effect remaining number of revolutions is “0” (step A773). The process of step A 772 serves as counting means for counting the number of times of execution of the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game.

  If the effect remaining number of revolutions is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the effect remaining number of revolutions is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  The effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is obtained and saved in the effect remaining rotation number region (step A777). The effect mode to be transitioned (rendering destination effect mode) can be known from the next mode transition information already saved before step A776. Next mode transition information regarding the next effect mode of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). In addition, the process of step A 776 is an effect mode execution control means for controlling the execution of any effect mode (game mode) among a plurality of effect modes (game mode) in accordance with the counting result by the counting means (step A 772) (Game mode execution control means).

  A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area, that is, if the state of the probability does not change (step A 780; Y), the rendering mode is not transmitted to the effect control device 300. End the information check process. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A 780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A 781). The process (step A 782) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed. Then, a high probability variation frequency command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A 785), rendering command setting processing (step A 786) is performed, and it is determined whether the new rendering mode is the left strike mode (Step A 787).

  If the new effect mode is not the mode to hit the left (step A 787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the new effect mode is a mode for left hitting (step A 787; Y), a left hitting instruction notification command is prepared (step A 788), and an effect command setting process (step A 789) is performed to check the effect mode information. End the process.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) in the above-described process of displaying the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the process transfer setting process during fanfare / interval of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number "3" relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A 792).

  Next, a signal regarding the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signals relating to the start of the big hit include, for example, a signal that turns on a big hit 1 signal (big hit + small hit output) and a signal that turns a big hit 4 signal on (big hit output).

  Next, a signal regarding the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 794). For the high probability & time short end signals, for example, a signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time state signal off A signal to turn on, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Thereafter, the information on the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A796). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A 797).

  Then, clear the information of the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A798), clear the information of the high probability notification flag area to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). A special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801). The information of the high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of display games is cleared (step A802). Thus, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the effect mode number area is saved in the effect mode number area (step A 803), and since the game control apparatus 100 manages the effect mode, the information on the effect remaining speed area is cleared (step A 804). The no update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, save the signal relating to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is on) in the test signal output data area (step A806) and turn on the game state display number 2 area to light the display LED during right-handed The number in the state is saved (step A 807), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small shift fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1, first, the process number "7" relating to the small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on a big hit 1 signal (big hit + small hit output).

  Then, the signal regarding the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information on the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A 816), and the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 817). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 818). The signal relating to the right strike instruction is, for example, a signal that turns on the firing position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to light the display LED in the right hitting, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 819), and the small hitting fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A11) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by "+1" (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). (Step A903) is performed.

  Thereafter, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A 904), the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is obtained (step A 905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the obtained release switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A 906; Y), the opening time of the special opening for short opening (0.2 s in the first embodiment) is set as the special figure game processing timer area The game is saved (step A 907), and the process setting process (step A 909) is performed to open the special winning opening in order to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval during processing is ended.

  Also, when the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A 906; N), the opening time (29 s in the case of the first embodiment) of the large winning opening for long opening (Step A 908), and in order to open the special winning opening, the special winning opening open processing shift setting process (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / interval middle processing is ended.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit pattern, (1) 4R, large winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), (4) 4R, large winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, large winning combination Mouth opening information 5 (all long opening), (6) 16R, big winning opening opening information 6 (1 to 8 R is long opening, 9 to 16 R is short opening), (7) 16 R, large winning opening opening information 7 (1 ~ 4R is long open, 5-16R is short open) is set.

  Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0", the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16", the special winning opening The release information 3 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening release information 5 data and the opening switching determination value "16" The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
Next, details of the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing (step A 909) in the above-described fan fare / in-interval processing will be described using FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing setting process transition setting during the special winning opening of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process, first, the processing number "4" relating to the special winning opening opening processing is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (Step A 912). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal that turns on a signal during special electric accessory 1 operation.

  Next, the information of the large winning a prize opening count number field which remembers the winning a prize number to special winning a prize mouth is cleared (step A914). Then, the on data of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening open process (step A12) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of opening the special winning opening in the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening open process, first, compare the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM whether the current round is the final round or not Is determined (step A1001).

  If it is the final round (step A1001; Y), save the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and prepare the ending command (step A1008) A1009) Go to the processing of step A1010 and perform the subsequent processing.

  If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening release information is obtained (step A1003). It is determined whether the release switching determination value is exceeded (A 1004).

  If the number of rounds exceeds the release switching determination value (step A1004; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.4 s) for short closing in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005) The interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

  If the number of rounds does not exceed the release switching determination value (step A1004; N), save the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006) The interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

Thereafter, the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the special winning opening residual ball process shift setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening open processing is ended.
[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process (step A1011) in the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process, first, the processing number "5" relating to the special winning opening residual ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (Step A1022). Then, the off data of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

  Whether the current round is the final round or not, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of RWM Are determined (step A1101).

  If it is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1111), the loaded flag, the special winning opening open information, the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern ( For example, 1.9 s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

  If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the release switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the release switching determination value In the case (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening information is a rank down effect value (step A1106) and the special winning opening opening information is If it is not a rank down effect type value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( Step A1107) If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (Step A1107; N), the process proceeds to Step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time (for example, 3.6 s) for rank down effect is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. Perform the process after that.

  Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 2 (step A 1110) in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the process transfer setting process 2 during fanfare / interval in the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number "3" relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal relating to the end of opening the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). Note that the signal relating to the end of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operation signal.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 2 ends.
[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process will be described using FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the jackpot end process shift setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, the process number "6" relating to the big hit end process is set as a process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

  Then, a signal relating to the end of opening the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). Note that the signal relating to the end of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operation signal.

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A1134), and clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A1135) . Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for upper round value determination. It clears (step A1137). Then, the information on the special winning opening opening information area storing the opening information determination flag of the special winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end shift setting processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described using FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end process of the first embodiment.

  In this big hit end process, first, it is determined whether the time shortening determination data is time saving operation data (step A1201). When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1202) is performed, and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit ending setting processing 2 (step A1203) is performed .

  Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (Step A1206). Furthermore, the effect mode rotational speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the rendering mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1210), and rendering command setting processing (step A1211) is performed.

  Note that as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including information of the rendering mode, which is further included in either "high probability / time short" or "high probability / no time short". In the case of the first embodiment, when the big hit is over, it is always in the definite variation state (so-called ST state). Therefore, as the probability information command, "high probability · time reduction · rendering mode A", "high probability · time reduction · presentation There are "Mode B", "High probability · Time reduction · Reproduction mode C", and "High probability · Time reduction None · Reproduction mode A", which is not used in this process, but others "Low probability · Time reduction None · Reproduction mode A There are “low probability, no time reduction, effect mode B”, and “low probability, no time reduction, effect mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability change number command corresponding to the high probability change number is prepared (step A1214), rendering command setting processing (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216).

When the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process is ended.
In addition, when the time saving state does not occur after the big hit end (step A1216; N), prepare the left hitting indication notification command (step A1217) and perform special command setting processing (step A1218), then shift to special processing routine processing The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above-described big hit end process will be described using FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding no time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal relating to the absence of the short time condition is, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 2 signal.

  Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the short state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). In addition, the signal about the start about the high probability state and the time absence state is, for example, a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time A signal for turning off the shortening status signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability status signal are included.

  Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1224), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving none flag are saved (step A1225). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1226), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to turn off the display LED during the right hitting, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting processing 1 is ended.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above-mentioned big hit end process will be described using FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal relating to the start of the short time condition is, for example, a signal that turns on the jackpot 2 signal. A signal relating to the start of the short time state is saved from inside the big hit and is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.

  Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). The signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are, for example, a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal A signal to turn on, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1233), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1234), and in the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving flag are saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1236), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the first embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the short time state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the middle of the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned big hit end process will be described using FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view ordinary process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

  In special processing routine processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number "0" which is related to special processing ordinary processing is set as a processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special processing game processing number area (step A 1242).

  Thereafter, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot include, for example, a signal that turns off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal that turns off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal that turns off the jackpot 4 signal.

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signal about the end of the big hit, the signal to turn off the signal during the condition device operation, the signal to turn off the signal during the item continuous operation device, the signal to turn off the signal per special symbol, and the special symbol 2 Includes a signal to turn off the signal.

  Subsequently, the information of the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information of the special view game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and set special processing shift processing 2 Finish.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hit fanfare middle processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare medium processing, the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare medium processing is ended.
[Small hitting Medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit middle processing shift setting process (step A1301) in the above-described small hit fanfare medium middle processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting medium process transfer setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit medium process transition setting process, first, the process number "8" which is a process number related to the small hit medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1312). ).

  Then, the small hit open time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal that turns on a signal during special electric accessory 1 operation.

  Then, save the on data of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and store the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winning for the special winning opening. It clears (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hit middle control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit middle processing transition setting process is ended.
[Small hit during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hitting middle process of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit middle processing, first, the small hit middle control pointer is loaded from the small hit middle control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the small hit middle control pointer loaded is the small hit operation end value (for example, "6") It is determined whether it is above (step A1402).

  If the value of the small hit middle control pointer loaded is not greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit middle control pointer value of the small hit middle control pointer area is updated by +1 (step A1403) And small hit operation shift setting processing (step A1404), and the small hit middle processing ends. If the value of the small hit middle control pointer loaded is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag It is determined whether the figure is in high probability (step A1406). Note that the determination in step A1406 targets a probability state and does not target a time saving state.

  When the loaded flag is in the special figure height probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure height probability (step A1406; N), a small hit end screen command is prepared (step A1407), and effect command setting processing (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hitting medium process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of small hitting operation shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit operation shift setting process, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). If the small hit middle control pointer value loaded in step A1401 is “0”, “2”, “4” (step A 1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the small hit middle control pointer value is set. The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the off data of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

  If the small hit middle control pointer value loaded in step A1401 is “1”, “3”, “5” (step A 1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the small hit middle control pointer value is set. The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding special winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the on data of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

  Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hitting operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  Small hit operation, small hit fanfare time (300ms), followed by large winning opening opening time (200ms), followed by wait time (1500ms), followed by large winning opening opening time (200ms), followed by weight Time (1500 ms), subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and subsequent remaining ball processing time (1900 ms), It is a series of operations of 7600 ms in total consisting of small hit ending time (100 ms).

  In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the first big winning opening opening time elapses, and the value of the control pointer goes through each processing corresponding to “0” to “5”, The value of the control pointer is "6". In this manner, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit residual ball processing is performed after the four opening operations of the special variation winning device 38. In the small hit operation, by setting the small hit ending time after the remaining ball processing time, the apparent ending time is 2000 ms obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time 1900 ms to the control small hit ending time 100 ms.

  During the small hit fanfare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variation winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the big winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, during the special winning opening opening time, the special variation winning device 38 is opened by the on control of the special winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number "9" relating to the small hit residual ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A1422).

  Then, the small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is turned off in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special view game processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hit remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit residual ball processing, the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1501) is performed, and the small hit residual ball processing is ended.
[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting end processing shift setting process (step A1501) in the above-mentioned small hit residual ball processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hitting end processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting end processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number "10" relating to the small hitting end processing is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512). ).

  The small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal about the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operation signal.

  Then, clear the information of the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A1515), clear the information of the small hit middle control pointer area to zero (step A1516), and set the small hitting end transition processing Finish.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described using FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the small hitting end process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process, first, the flag related to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure height probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure height probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), the effect set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation number is obtained and saved in the effect remaining rotation number region (step A1606), and the next mode shift information is obtained The next mode transition information area is saved (step A1607).

  Then, a probability information command corresponding to the rendering mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). .

  If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), rendering command setting processing (step A1610) Do A1611.

  Then, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed. Also, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A1614), rendering command setting processing (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new rendering mode is a left strike mode (Step A1616).

  If the new effect mode is not the mode to hit the left (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A1616; Y), a command to issue a left hit instruction is prepared (step A1617), and an effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed.

  Then, a flag relating to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the flag loaded in step A1619 is in special figure time reduction (step A1620). When the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special drawing mode (step A1620; Y), the special figure transition processing setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end process is ended.

  If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special mode (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn off the display LED in the right strike, save the number in the left strike state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622), and perform special process transition processing setting process 3 (step A1623), and small End the hit end process.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hitting end process will be described using FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 according to the first embodiment.

  In special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3, first, the processing number "0" which is related to special processing ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special processing game processing number area (step A1632).

  Then, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the big hit 1 signal. Also, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information of the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, clear the information of the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1637), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and set special processing shift processing 3 finish.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in the subroutine of the special drawing game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of effect command setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

  Thereby, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like a rendering command, but it may be configured in more bytes. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to the multi-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process is ended.

  By writing command data (ACTION) in the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. It will be done.

  In this manner, the game control device 100 transmits the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives these commands and performs effect control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control apparatus 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of symbol variation control processing of the first embodiment.

  In the symbol variation control process, first, the variation control flag of the object is set and it is checked whether or not the symbol is changing (step A1801), and it is determined as a result of the check whether it is changing (step A1802) .

  If it is changing (step A1802; Y), the symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blinking control timer that measures the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by “−1” (step A1804), and it is determined whether the blinking control timer is “0” (step A1805).

  If the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target symbol and state is acquired (step A1806), and the blinking control timer initial value is the target symbol The flash control timer area is saved (step A1807). The blink control timer initial value will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the variation symbol number of the target symbol is updated by “+1” (step A1808), and the process proceeds to step A1809. If the blink control timer is not "0" (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1809.

  Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is ended. Do.

  In step A1802, when it is not changing (step A1802; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1810). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1811), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is ended. Do.

  In addition, on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game processing, the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of display table 2 (for stopping), and the address information of display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined. There is.

[Flash control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the blinking control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the above-mentioned symbol variation control processing will be described using FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. FIG.

The blinking control timer initial value is set for each target symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The blink control timer initial value is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1, and is 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2. Further, the blink control timer initial value is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1, and is 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 160 ms when the general view is in the state 1 and 120 ms when the general view is in the state 2.

  The initial value of the blinking control timer is smaller than the value of the state 1 although the value of the state 2 is smaller, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The initial value of the blinking control timer may have a larger value of state 2 than the value of state 1. For example, the blinking control timer initial value is 60 ms when Special Figure 1 is in State 1, 80 ms when Special Figure 1 is in State 2, and 60 ms when Special Figure 2 is in State 1. The special pattern 2 may be 80 ms when the state 2 is, 120 ms when the common state is the state 1, and 160 ms when the common state is the state 2.

  The state 2 is a game state advantageous to the player as compared with the state 1, and a specific game state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, when Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is not in the probability variation state, it corresponds to State 1, and when Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is in the probability variation state, State 2 It corresponds to

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 is a game of the gaming machine 10 in the special display 1 symbol display unit 53, the special view 2 symbol display unit 54, and the common pattern symbol display unit 55 in addition to the state display unit 57 in the collective display device 50. The status can be displayed.

  Further, in the batch display device 50, the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 in the special display 1 symbol display portion 53, the special view 2 symbol display portion 54, and the common pattern symbol display portion 55 instead of the state display portion 57. Can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the first state in the first period in the state display unit 57, displays the second state in the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol. The first state display can be performed by the portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, and the common pattern symbol display portion 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 performs notification (trigger notification) of gaming state transition in the state display unit 57 at the time of gaming state transition such as probability fluctuation state from the normal state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is in the gaming state in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 and the common pattern symbol display portion 55 when the gaming state such as the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is the steady state. Informs (stationary informing) of the steady state. The gaming machine 10 does not necessarily require notification of the gaming state by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the common pattern symbol display unit 55. The gaming machine 10 may notify of the gaming state with one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and the common pattern symbol display unit 55. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may report a more complicated gaming state by a combination of display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the common pattern symbol display unit 55. . Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 reports a more complicated gaming state by a combination of the display modes of the status display unit 57, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the common pattern symbol display unit 55. It may be Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the progress of the game that is easy to understand.

[Distribution process]
Next, details of the distribution process (steps A 476, A 479, and A 485) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of distribution processing of the first embodiment.

  In the distribution process, the second half variation selection table of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 or the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 A process for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game or selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3 It is.

  In the sorting process, first, the first data of the prepared second half fluctuation group table (selection table), the second half fluctuation selection table (selection table), and the first half fluctuation selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, “0” ) Is checked (step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether the first data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, second half fluctuation pattern, or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to, the distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  If the first data in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated ( Step A1907), the distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table One distribution value defined at first is acquired (step A1903).

  Subsequently, from the random number values (the values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478 and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting processing, the distributed value acquired in step A1903 is After subtraction and calculation of a new random number value (step A1904), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A1905; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A1906), the process returns to the process of step A1903.

  That is, after obtaining the allocation value defined next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table in step A1903, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random number value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y). Thereby, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern specified in the second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table Select the change number or the first half change number. When it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A1907), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A 475) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of 2-byte distribution processing of the first embodiment.

  The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 2-byte distribution process, first, whether the first data of the second half of the change group table (selection table) prepared in the change pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) Is checked (step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether the head data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but defines the second half fluctuation pattern group in which only the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the fluctuation group table (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is specified at the head .

  Then, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (step A2002; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is ended. Do. On the other hand, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value defined first in the second half fluctuation group table is acquired (step A2003).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step A2004) Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2005). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2005; N), after updating to the address of the next distributed value (step A2006), the process returns to step A2003. That is, after the distribution value defined next in the fluctuation group selection table is obtained in step A2003, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value already determined in step A2005 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance is generated. A numerical value is calculated (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2005).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the second half fluctuation group table. When it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2007), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S130) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of common drawing game processing of the first embodiment. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  In this common game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a and a general electricity winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a Do. Next, if the standard game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number A process (step B5) of setting a common drawing game sequence branch table to be referred to in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the common drawing game process number using the table is performed . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed according to the game processing number.

  In step B7, if the game processing number is "0", the start of change of the common drawing change display game is monitored, and the setting of change start of the common drawing change display game and the setting of the effect, and the common drawing change processing is performed. The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set the information necessary for the purpose. When the game processing number is "1" in step B7, a common drawing variation processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the common drawing display processing.

  If the game processing number is "2" in step B7, and the result of the common view variation display game is a hit, setting of the general public open time according to whether or not the time saving state is in progress, A drawing-in-progress process (step B10) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process in the drawing. When the game processing number is "3" at step B7, the processing of the common drawing is performed to continue the processing during the common drawing, or to set the information necessary for performing the residual electric bulb processing (step Do B11).

  In step B7, when the game processing number is "4", general electric remnant ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required to perform the end processing per common drawing. If the game processing number is "5" in step B7, the end processing (step B13) is performed to set information necessary for performing the normal processing (step B8).

  Thereafter, a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the common drawing indicator is prepared (step B14), and the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the common drawing indicator (step B15) To complete the regular game processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the drawing game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 to perform the subsequent processing.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of gate switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input on the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a game state in which the player strikes the right (step B102). Here, the right-handed gaming state is the middle of a big hit, the middle of a small hit, or the middle of a special event time (during a public support). In the case of the gaming state in which the player strikes the right (step B102; Y), the process proceeds to step B105. If it is not the gaming state to hit the right (step B102; N), prepare a left hitting instruction command (step B103), perform the rendering command setting process (step B104), obtain the number of common drawing holdings, and hold the common drawing holdings Is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

  If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the per random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is It calculates (step B107). The random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

  If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N) , The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a view showing a flowchart of a routine prize winning switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this common prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not it is in a common figure, that is, whether or not the regular changing game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. Is determined (step B111). Then, if the drawing is in the middle (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B112) and an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y) If determined, the count number of the common charge counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated common charge counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B114), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y) When it is judged, the value (eg “4”) of the operation end is hit in the control pointer area during the common drawing as a process for closing the common charge based on the count number of the common charge counter becoming the upper limit. Step B115) The general drawing game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general prize winning switch monitoring processing is ended. In other words, if there is a general prize winning above the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, then hit the normal processing control pointer area during the common drawing and save the end value, and the hit state of the common drawing is halfway Make it finish.

  If it is determined in step B111 that a common figure is not hit (step B111; N), if it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114 When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value in step B (step B114; N), the routine prize winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ordinary drawing processing of the first embodiment. In this ordinary drawing routine processing, it is first determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is "0" (step B121), and if the ordinary drawing reservation number is "0" (step B121; Y), The figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the ordinary figure normal process is ended. In addition, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B121; N), a random number is loaded from the per random number storage area (for 1 number of reservations), per symbol random number storage area (for 1 number of reservations) (step B122) , A random number storage area (for holding number 1), and a per symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing variation display game is in the common drawing high probability higher than normal, that is, it is a time saving state (step B 124). If the drawing probability is not high (step B124; N), a low probability lower limit judgment value is set (step B125), and if the drawing probability is high (step B124; Y), the high probability lower judgment value is It sets (step B126). The low probability upper limit judgment value and the high probability upper limit judgment value are common values (for example, “251”). Further, the low probability lower limit judgment value and the high probability lower limit judgment value are different values (for example, the low probability lower limit judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”), and the low probability lower limit judgment value By comparison, the high probability lower limit judgment value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability becomes higher at high probability than low probability, and becomes, for example, 0/251 for low probability and 250/251 for high probability.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (step B127). If the hit random number is not equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value It is determined (step B128). In step B127, if the random number is greater than or equal to the upper determination value (step B127; Y), or if the random number is less than the lower determination value in step B127 or B128 (step B127; N, step B128; Y), ie, In the case of out of place, the outlier information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), outliers stop symbol numbers are set (step B130), and outliers information is saved in the common figure stop symbol information area (step B131). Also, in steps B127 and B128, if the random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, ie, in the case of a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), save the hit information in the hit flag area ( In step B132), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols.

  Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). Thereafter, the random number storage area per common drawing is shifted (step B137), the free area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the number of general drawing reservations is updated by “−1” (step B139). That is, when the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 is executed, the ranking of the common drawing reservation numbers “2” to “4” being held after the common drawing reservation number “1” Process one by one. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 in the common drawing per random number storage area is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by “1”.

Then, the processing shift setting processing (step B140) is performed during the common drawing fluctuation, and the common drawing normal processing is ended.
[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step B141) in the common drawing routine processing described above will be described. FIG. 81 is a view showing a flowchart of a first processing for setting the processing for setting a common processing routine in the first embodiment. In this ordinary drawing normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as a process number for proceeding to the ordinary drawing normal process (step B151), and the process number is saved in the ordinary drawing game process number area (step B151) B152). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the routine diagram transition processing setting processing 1 is ended.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to normal processing during normal processing in the above-described normal processing will be described in detail. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for setting transition to processing during variation of a common drawing according to the first embodiment. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as a processing number for shifting to common drawing fluctuating processing (step B161), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area ( Step B162) The common drawing variation time (common (for example, 500 ms with low probability and high probability)) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B163). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of the common drawing variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). In addition, the signal regarding the start of a common drawing fluctuation display game is a signal which turns on the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation.

  Next, a floating flag indicating that the spread map fluctuation display game is moving is saved in the spread map fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking period of the common drawing indicator in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B166), finish.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the general drawing variation in-progress processing (step B9) in the general drawing game processing described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of processing during common drawing fluctuation of the first embodiment. In the general drawing fluctuating process, a processing for setting transition to a normal drawing normal processing (step B171) is performed, and the general drawing fluctuating process is ended.

[Processing transition setting processing during common map display]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to general processing during general display during the processing for general fluctuation during the above processing (step B171) will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for setting transition to processing during common drawing display according to the first embodiment. In the processing for setting transition to processing during popular display, first, the processing number is set to “2” as setting processing for shifting to the processing during general display (step B181), and Save (step B182). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B183). Further, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the common drawing is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). In addition, the signal regarding the fluctuation | variation end of a common figure is a signal which turns off the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the common drawing variation display game is stopped is saved in the common drawing variation control flag area (step B185), and the common drawing display processing transition setting process is ended.
[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during common-diagram display of the first embodiment. In this general drawing display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the common drawing normal processing is loaded (step B191), and the information on the RWM hit flag area is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

  If the hit flag is not hit information (step B193; N), the ordinary drawing transition processing transition setting process 1 (step B198) is performed to shift to the ordinary drawing normal processing, and the ordinary drawing display processing is terminated. This common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1 is the processing shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), the in-hit processing setting table is set (step B194).

  Then, the hit start pointer value (one of the control pointers “0”, “2” and “4”) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common control pointer area during the common drawing (step B195), The general-purpose game open time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the common-pattern stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common-play game processing timer area (step B 196). Thereby, the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and, for example, the opening can be performed four times. Thereafter, the processing transition setting processing (step B 197) is performed per common drawing, and the processing during the common drawing display is ended.

[Per process of processing transition setting processing per common map]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (step B 197) per common drawing in the processing of displaying the common drawing described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing shift setting processing during the drawing of the first embodiment. In this processing per process setting processing, first, "3" is set as a processing number for processing transition to processing per common drawing (step B201), and the processing number is saved in the general processing game processing number area. (Step B202). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of the popular drawing variation display game (a signal related to the hitting of the common variation display game) and a signal relating to the start of the general power operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). In addition, the signal about the start of the hit of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a signal which turns on the signal during normal symbol 1 normally, and the signal about the start of common power operation is a signal which turns on the signal during ordinary electric character 1 operation It is.

Next, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid, on data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B204).
Further, the information of the common charge count number area storing the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (step B205), and the common electric charge unfair storing the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the regular monitoring period The information on the winning number area is cleared (step B206). Then, a flag for defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize device 37 is saved in the common use fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the processing transition setting processing during the common drawing is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of per-normal-diagram processing of the first embodiment. In the processing during this common drawing, first, the control pointer during the common drawing is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the control pointer during the common drawing that is loaded is the value of the control pointer upper limit value area per common drawing. It is determined whether (the end value of hit) has been reached (step B212).

  Then, if the value of the control pointer during the common drawing does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the common drawing (step B212; N), the control pointer during the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B213) The routine operation shift setting process (step B214) is performed, and the process is ended during the normal diagram. Also, if the value of the control pointer during the common drawing reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the common drawing (the value of the hit end) (step B212; Y), the process passes step B213 and sets the normal operation shift The process (step B214) is performed, and the process is ended during the common drawing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general-purpose power operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-mentioned per-normal-process processing will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of generalization operation transition setting processing according to the first embodiment. The common power operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the drive of the common voltage solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed in accordance with the value of the control pointer (step B221).

  If the value of the control pointer is either “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the common game processing timer area (step B222). In order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B223), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is either "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the general power release time (for example, 1700 ms) which is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B224) Save the on data in the common solenoid output data area to turn on the common solenoid 37c (step B225), and end the common power operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B226. That is, "4" is set as the process number (step B226) in order to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and perform the routine charge ball processing (step B12). Then, the processing number is saved in the regular drawing game processing number area (step B227), and the general control residual ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the regular drawing game processing timer area (step B228). Thereafter, the off data is saved in the fuel solenoid output data area in order to turn off the fuel solenoid 37c (step B229), and the power transfer operation setting process is ended.

  Next, the common control operation in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a pressure control operation timing chart of the normal change winning device according to the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  The normal power operation in the case of the hit symbol 1 in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is a total of 1200 ms consisting of a normal drawing display time (600 ms), a subsequent public power open time (500 ms) and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms) thereafter. Is a series of actions. In the case of the hit symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes "4" after the passage of the normal power release time, and the normal charge remaining ball processing is performed after one opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  In addition, the common power operation in the case of the hit pattern 2 in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is a common drawing display time (600 ms), a subsequent public power open time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), and thereafter It is a series of operations of 4800 ms in total consisting of the general charge release time (1700 ms) and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms) thereafter. In the case of the hit symbol 2, the control pointer value becomes "2" after the first general power release time has elapsed, and the control pointer values are "2" and "3", respectively, and control is performed. The value of the pointer is "4". In this way, in the case of the hit symbol 2, the normal charge remaining ball processing is performed after the two opening operations of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  In addition, the common power operation in the case of the hit pattern 3 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the common drawing display time (600 ms), the subsequent public power open time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and thereafter It is a series of operations of 6700 ms in total consisting of the general charge release time (1700 ms), the wait time thereafter (200 ms), the general charge release time (1700 ms), and the remaining ball treatment time (600 ms) thereafter. In the case of 3 hit symbols, the control pointer value becomes “0” after the first general power release time, and the control pointer values correspond to “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”. After each process, the value of the control pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the hit symbol 3, the normal charge remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 three times.

  Note that, during the common drawing display time, the weight time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the common charge solenoid 37c. Also, during the normal power release time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by the on control of the normal power solenoid 37c.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the routine remaining ball processing of the first embodiment. In the generalization residual ball processing, the end processing shift setting processing per common drawing (step B231) is performed, and the generality residual sphere processing is ended.

[Process for setting end processing transition per common drawing]
Next, the details of the per-diagram drawing end processing shift setting process (step B231) in the above-mentioned pedecha residual ball processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of end processing shift setting processing per common drawing in the first embodiment. In the processing for setting end processing per common drawing, first, the processing number "5" related to the ending processing per common drawing is set (step B241), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B242). ).

  Thereafter, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B 243), and a signal regarding the operation termination of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is stored in the test signal output data area (step B 244). In addition, the signal regarding the completion | finish of operation of the normal fluctuation winning a prize apparatus 37 is a signal which turns off the signal in operation of the electric motor-operated part 1 normally.

  Next, the information of the common charge count number area for counting the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B246), and the processing for setting the end processing for the common drawing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the end-of-round-drawing end processing (step B13) in the above-described base-draw game processing will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of end processing per common drawing in the first embodiment. In the end processing per common drawing, common processing normal processing shift setting processing 2 (step B251) is performed, and the end processing per common drawing is ended.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the above-described common drawing end processing will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a general-pattern normal processing shift setting process 2 according to the first embodiment. In this common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number "0" related to the common drawing routine processing is set (step B261), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B262) .

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of hit of the spread map fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). Note that the signal relating to the end of the hit of the common drawing fluctuation game is a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

  Thereafter, a flag defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the routine drawing transition processing setting processing 2 is ended. .

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the segment LED editing process of the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings relating to the driving of the LEDs constituting the round display unit 51, the special view 1 suspension display unit 52, the common drawing suspension display unit 56, and the status display unit 57 provided in the collective display device 50 Do.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by adding "1" (step C11). The blink control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on timing of the common view suspension display is determined (step C12), and when the output on timing is (step C12; Y), the common drawing suspension number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on timing If not (step C12; N), the common drawing reservation number display table 2 is set (step C14). Note that the determination of the output on timing of the common view hold display can be performed by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, by referring to the 5th bit of the timer which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, it is possible to set a blink cycle of 128 ms.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the common drawing reserve number is acquired from the set common drawing reserve number display table 1 or the common drawing reserve number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of LED_00 to LED_31.

  For example, the common drawing reservation number display table 1 and the common drawing reservation number display table 2 have the same values for the common drawing reservation numbers “0” to “2” and different values for the common drawing reservation numbers “3” and “4”. It is. Thus, in the common drawing reservation display unit 56, the common drawing reservation number "0" turns off the corresponding LED, the common drawing reservation number "1", the "2" turns on the corresponding LED, and the common drawing reservation number "3" , "4" has realized the blinking of the corresponding LED.

  Next, the output on timing of the special view 1 suspension display is determined (step C16), and when the output on timing is (step C16; Y), the special view 1 suspension number display table 1 is set (step C17) and output If it is not the on timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 is set (step C18). The determination of the output on timing of the special view 1 suspension display can also be made similar to the determination of the output on timing of the common view suspension display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, to the common view hold display, it is possible to set a blinking cycle different from the common view hold display.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table 1 or the special drawing 1 holding number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C19). Also in the special view 1 suspension display unit 52, the lighting mode of the LED is realized in the same manner as the common view suspension display unit 56.

  Next, the output on timing of the special view 2 suspension display is determined (step C20), and when the output on timing is (step C20; Y), the special view 2 suspension number display table 1 is set (step C21) and output When it is not the on timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 reservation number display table 2 is set (step C22). The determination of the output on timing of the special view 2 suspension display can also be made similar to the determination of the output on timing of the common view suspension display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, to the common view hold display, it is possible to set a blinking cycle different from the common view hold display.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number is acquired from the set special figure 2 pending number display table 1 or the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C23). Also in the special view 2 reserve display unit 58, the lighting mode of the LED is realized in the same manner as the common view reserve display unit 56.

  Furthermore, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25) .

Next, the gaming state display table 1 is set (step C26), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number 1 is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
In addition, the gaming state display table 1 is a state whether the gaming state of the special figure game is in a short time (during power support), in other words, whether it is one of the gaming states advantageous to the player or not. A display mode for notifying the display unit 57 is defined. For example, "normally medium" is notified by turning off the LED_29 of the state display unit 57, and "special pattern time short (during common power support)" is notified by turning on the LED_29.

  Thereafter, the gaming state display table 2 is set (step C28), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number 2 is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is ended.

  In addition, the gaming state display table 2 indicates whether or not the gaming state of the special drawing game is a game state in which the player strikes the right, in other words, whether or not another gaming state advantageous to the player is displayed. Defines the display mode for informing. For example, "normal hit (left hit)" is notified by turning off the LED_30 in the state display unit 57, and "right hit" is notified by turning on the LED_30. It should be noted that there is a period corresponding to a gaming state such as during a big hit, during a small hit, and during a general power support during a period of informing "right-handed".

  As a result, in the segment LED editing process, the player can be notified of the progress of the game by the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special view 1 suspension display unit 52, the special view 2 suspension display unit 58, the common view suspension display unit 56, and the status display unit, which are display target setting targets by segment LED editing processing 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

  Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing and board radio wave fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraudulent activity will be described. For a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player according to the outcome of a game, a fraudulent act may be conducted to obtain the gaming value fraudulently. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using a magnet is conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent acts, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to the types are required. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be detected accurately.

  In particular, it is misjudged that an abnormal state has occurred despite the occurrence of an abnormal state leading to a fraudulent act, and giving notification etc. causes a sense of distrust to the player, and causes the game to be avoided in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important not to erroneously detect such an abnormal state.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of the abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic detector that detects the abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects the abnormal radio wave, and the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For the purpose of preventing false detection of an abnormal state, for example, the following magnet fraud monitoring processing and board radio wave fraud monitoring processing are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 serving as a magnetic detector that detects an abnormal magnetism, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined to set the start and the end of fraud notification, and the like. In addition, since a magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector which detects approach of a magnet, a magnetic sensor can be put in another way like a magnet sensor.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, whether the magnetic sensor is turned on, that is, the abnormal magnetism is detected, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) It is determined whether or not it is (step C31). If the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, “1” is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period to update it (step C32) ), It is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (step C33).

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (step C33; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms), an abnormality is determined. If an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) of the magnet fraud notification timer is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C35). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step C36), and a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region or not It determines (step C43).

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism continuously for a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor is not turned on (step C31; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification defining the notification time of the magnet fraud. If the timer is not "0", the magnet fraud notification timer is updated by subtracting "1" (step C39). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step C40). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step C33; N), the processing also proceeds to step C39.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C40; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step C40; Y), that is, the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period is over, or initially If the fraud notification has not been performed from the above, a command to end the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step C41). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43).

  Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), rendering command setting processing is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is ended. Do.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, based on a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 which forms a radio wave detector for detecting an abnormal radio wave, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined to set the start and the end of fraud notification.

  In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). If the board radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud alert timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step C52).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step C53), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C54), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio wave cheating, unlike in the case of magnetic cheating, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the board radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 is configured to determine that an abnormal state has occurred, only when the board radio wave sensor detects an abnormal radio wave once.

  On the other hand, when the board radio wave sensor is not turned on (step C51; N), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification is not made unless the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is "0". The timer is updated by subtracting "1" from the timer (step C55). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step C56).

  If the value of the radio wave informing timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave irregular monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing is over, or initially If the informing notification is not performed from the command, prepare a command of the board radio wave informing end (step C57), and prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave illegal flag (step C58). It is determined whether the flag matches the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step C59).

  Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (step C59; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), rendering command setting processing is performed (step C61), and board radio wave fraud monitoring End the process.

  By performing the above-mentioned magnet fraud monitoring process and board radio wave fraud monitoring process, it is possible to accurately detect the occurrence of an abnormal state. That is, although the gaming machine is equipped with parts that generate magnetism such as a solenoid, if it is determined that the magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period, it is determined that an abnormal state is present. Occurrence can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with parts that emit radio waves, it is possible to minimize the damage by immediately determining that the detection of the abnormal radio waves is an abnormal state.

  In the first embodiment, detection of anomalous magnetism is simply a state where magnetism is detected, but a state where magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a non-abnormal state may be detected, or may be a predetermined threshold or more. The state in which the magnetism is detected may be considered abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, detection of an abnormal radio wave is simply made to be in a state where radio waves are received, but in a non-abnormal state, it is received in a state where radio waves of intensity not received or in an non-abnormal state It may be in a state of receiving radio waves of no frequency. Further, a state in which a radio wave whose intensity is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold or a radio wave of a specific frequency may be detected as an abnormality. When setting the threshold by magnetic intensity, radio wave intensity, or frequency, a signal may be output when the threshold is exceeded by the magnetic sensor 61 or board radio wave sensor 62, or the threshold value may be output by the control device. It may be monitored whether it has exceeded.

  From the above, in the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio wave sensor 62) for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector Based on the above, an abnormal state detection control means (game control apparatus 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state is provided, and in the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means detects abnormal magnetism continuously for a predetermined period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred, but in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only by detecting an abnormal radio wave once.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a second diagram of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal control device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device are created and set in the output buffer.

  In the external information editing process, first, information is set in accordance with an error state or a security state. In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, the door / frame is in the process of setting the glass frame opening error (step C71; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is being generated (step C72; Y) The on data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, when neither glass frame open error nor main frame open error occurs (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C75) Save the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch, etc. is not "0", the "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, if the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, it is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out that initialization of the data stored in the RAM has been performed.

  Magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), board radio fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), general electricity fraud is occurring (step C83; Y), or a big prize If there is a mouth fraud (step C84; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

  On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, the board radio fraud, the frame radio fraud, the common power fraud, or the big winning opening fraud occurs (steps C80 to C84; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is tested Save to the signal output data area (step C87).

  Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out is performed, and a starting opening signal editing process (step C89) Do. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step C91).

  If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is “0” (step C 91; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is in the external information output data area After saving (step C92), the external information editing process is ended. In addition, when the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C93), finish the external information editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described using FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main prize ball signal editing processing according to the first embodiment. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts and the planned number of game medium payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10). Is a process of outputting to the external device.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is judged whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0" (step C103).

  Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step C103; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by "-1" (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area The winning ball signal output control timer initial value is saved (step C105). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the main prize ball signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step C103; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C108), finish the main prize ball signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C106; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

  By the above processing, information on the planned game medium payout number is transmitted to the outside. In addition, basically, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device and complete the payout of the game ball after the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is established. Information on the planned number of game medium payouts, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out, is output to the outside between the fulfillment of the payout conditions and the payout number of game media being paid out.

  In other words, it is possible to externally output information on the planned number of game medium payouts, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out, until the game control device 100 pays out the game media of the number of payouts after the payout condition is satisfied. External output means.

  However, if the number of generated prize balls is small and this does not reach the predetermined number (for example 10) even if it is added to the value of the remaining number field, information on the planned number of game medium payouts after the actual payout is completed May be output. It should be noted that by decreasing the unit of planned game medium payout number corresponding to one main winning ball signal (for example, "1"), the payout condition is always satisfied, and then the game media of the number of payouts are paid out. In the meantime, it is also possible to externally output information on the planned number of game medium payouts, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out.

  From the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out gaming media and control means for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of payouts of gaming media based on the fulfillment of predetermined payout conditions (game control In the gaming machine provided with the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out until the payout number of game media is paid out after the payout condition is satisfied. The external output means (game control apparatus 100) which can output the information regarding the number of planned game media payouts outside will be provided. In addition, it is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine, using game media as medals.

  Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on the storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of planned game medium payouts not yet output, and the fulfillment of the payout conditions. The adding means (game control apparatus 100) for adding the planned game medium payout number corresponding to the satisfied payout condition to the game medium storage area, and the planned game medium payout number stored in the game medium storage area has reached a predetermined number Based on the above, transmission means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of planned game medium payout numbers to the outside, and a predetermined number of planned game medium payout numbers transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area And a subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main winning ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main winning ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control apparatus 100 outputs one pulse (main winning ball signal) for each predetermined payout (for example, 10) of gaming media. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from "OFF" to "ON" when the value of the output control timer is "48", and "ON" to "OFF" when the value of the output control timer is "16" And maintain “OFF” until the value of the output control timer becomes “0”. That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a 192 ms pulse signal consisting of an “ON” time of 128 ms and an “OFF” time of 64 ms.

  The payout control device 200, unlike the gaming control device 100, outputs one pulse (a winning ball signal) for each payout of a predetermined number of (for example, ten) gaming media. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device check the alignment between the payout schedule of the gaming media and the payout result of the gaming media, and can make the external device cope with the illegal payout.

  In addition, in the winning during the big hit period, when the payout of game media is delayed due to running out of balls etc and the game media is paid out after the big hit, the external device is only the winning ball signal output by the payout control device 200, It was not possible to judge whether the payout was based on winnings during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main winning ball signal so that the external device (for example, the hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step C89) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of starting opening signal editing processing according to the first embodiment. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a or the start opening 2 switch 37a.

  In the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step C112). If the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is “0” (step C112; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the starting opening signal is output is “0” (step C113).

  Then, if the start opening signal output number is not "0" (step C113; N), the start opening signal output number is updated by "-1" (step C114), and the start opening signal output to the start opening signal output control timer area The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The start opening signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 64 ms) obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the start port signal and the off state (for example, low level) For example, it is 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended. In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step C113; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C118), finish the starting opening signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step C112; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output ON area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is more than predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C116; N), save the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step C118) The start opening signal editing process is ended.

  Next, the alerting function of the gaming machine 10 will be described. The alerting function is a function of alerting a player using display or sound. The targets of the alerting include “dwelling” to the game by the player, forgetting to take out the prepaid card, and the like.

  The gaming machine 10 warns the player when the special figure game is hit. Therefore, first, the type of big hit will be described using FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of hit classification of the special figure game of the first embodiment.

  The special figure game executed in the gaming machine 10 includes a big hit 1, a big hit 2, a big hit 3, a big hit 4, a big hit, and a small hit as types. In each case, the number of rounds, the probability fluctuation, the general power support, and the ending type are set.

  The number of rounds is a parameter indicating the hit performance. The probability fluctuation and the general power support are parameters indicating the game state after hit. The ending type indicates the type of ending displayed on the display device 41 during the ending period. In addition, an ending period means the predetermined period after the end of the last round in a hit. For example, the ending period is a period from the closing of the special variation winning device 38 in the final round to the start of the game in the new gaming state (the start of variation of the symbol).

  In addition, probability change means that it is in the high game state from the game state where the hit probability of the special figure game is low, and the common power support easily wins the prize in the normal change winning device 37 (for example, the extension of the open period) To be in a gaming state in which an increase in lottery opportunities for special drawing games is achieved. In addition, the probability fluctuation and / or the general power support may be combined with the time reduction to shorten the fluctuation display time in the special figure game.

  For example, the jackpot 1 is the number of rounds per hit "16", the fluctuation fluctuation up to 100 after the collision display "100 times", and the fluctuation power display after the fluctuation fluctuation "100 times" It is the performance that it has. In addition, the jackpot 1 displays “ending 1” or “ending 2” on the display device 41 after the jackpot ends.

  In addition, the big hit 2 is the number of rounds per hit "8", the probability fluctuation up to the fluctuation display "100 times" after the end, and further the common power support up to fluctuation display "100 times" after the probability fluctuation end It is the performance that it has. Also, the big hit 2 displays “ending 1” or “ending 2” on the display device 41 after the big hit.

  Also, the jackpot 3 is a performance having common power support up to the number of rounds in the hit "8" and the fluctuation indication "100 times" after the hitting, but there is no probability fluctuation after the hitting. Also, the big hit 3 displays “ending 3” on the display device 41 after the big hit ends.

  Also, the big hit 4 is a performance that has the number of rounds per hit “2” and the probability fluctuation up to the fluctuation display “100 times” after the end of the hit, but there is no general power support after the completion of the probability fluctuation. In addition, the big hit 4 displays “ending 4” on the display device 41 after the big hit ends.

  Moreover, small hit is a performance that has the number of rounds “2” in the hit, but there is neither probability fluctuation nor generalization support after the end of the hit. Further, the small hit displays “ending 4” on the display device 41 after the big hit ends.

  In each hit, the jackpot 1 is the highest-value hit for the player, and the jackpot 2 is the player's next-highest-hit hit for the jackpot 1. On the other hand, a small hit is the lowest value hit for the player. However, by making it difficult to distinguish between the big hit 4 and the small hit, the gaming machine 10 produces an expectation of probability fluctuation even for a small hit.

Next, the ending type will be described using FIG. 103 to FIG. FIG. 103 is a view showing an example of a display mode for each ending type according to the first embodiment.
First, “ending 1” will be described. "Ending 1" is an ending selected at the end of the hit when the hit is the first hit when the hits are continuous among the hits in which there is a probability fluctuation with a probability change after the end of the hit. For example, “Ending 1” is selected at the end of the hit when there is a jackpot 1 or a jackpot 2 that occurs in the gaming state without probability fluctuation and general charge support.

  “Ending 1” performs a definite change explicit mode rush display from timing T10 to timing T13 (for example, 13000 ms). The probability variation explicit mode rush display is a display indicating to the player that the game mode (probability variation explicit mode) indicating that it is a probability variation state is entered. The probability variation explicit mode rush display is a form of guidance display for guiding the player to the gaming state which is advantageous.

  Here, the definite variation explicit mode entry display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a view showing an example of the game mode effect display after the end of the hit according to the first embodiment. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (1) is a probability change explicit mode rush display in "Ending 1". The definite variation explicit mode entry display includes a mode name in the definite variation mode and a display "entry" which clearly indicates entry into the definite variation mode. In addition, a display "entry" is an example of a display which specifies entry into a definite variation explicit mode, and may be a display "start", a display "first time", or the like.

  "Ending 1" displays a company logo from timing T13 to timing T14 (for example, 5000 ms) after the definite variation explicit mode entry display. The company logo display may be a still image or a moving image, and may fade in or out in time. Also, corporate logo display may be accompanied by voice or music.

  Here, corporate logo display will be described using FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of the company logo display after the end of the hit according to the first embodiment. The company logo display shown in FIG. 105 (1) displays the logo of the company related to the gaming machine 10. The company logo display is not limited to the manufacturing company name of the gaming machine 10, but may be the sales company name, the brand name of the gaming machine 10, etc., and two or more company logos are simultaneously displayed or switched and displayed. It is also good. In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 (2), the gaming machine 10 may perform company logo display in parallel with (for example, overlap with) the probability variation explicit mode rush display. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a favorable impression of the corporate logo by displaying the corporate logo together with the guidance display for guiding the player to the gaming state which is advantageous. Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (3), the gaming machine 10 may perform company logo display in parallel (for example, window display) with the definite variation explicit mode rush display.

  After the display of the company logo, “ENDING 1” displays a reminder A from timing T14 to timing T15 (for example, 2000 ms). The alert A display is a first alert display for the player, for example, an alert for alerting the user to forgot to take the prepaid card. The attention A display may be a still image or a moving image including a pictogram, or may be faded in or out in time. Further, the alert A display may be accompanied by a voice or a warning sound.

  Here, the warning A display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of the alert A display after the end of the hit according to the first embodiment. The alert A display shown in FIG. 106 (1) displays the message "Please be careful not to remove the prepaid card or theft." In addition, as shown in FIG. 106 (2), the gaming machine 10 may perform alert A display in parallel (for example, overlap) with the probability variation explicit mode rush display. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can give the player an interest in the reminder A display by displaying the reminder A display together with the guidance display for guiding the player to the gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106 (3), the gaming machine 10 may perform caution A display in parallel (for example, window display) with the probability variation explicit mode rush display.

  “Ending 1” performs attention B display from timing T15 to timing T16 (for example, 2000 ms) after the attention A display. The alerting B display is a second alerting display to be given to the player, for example, a display for alerting the player to a game. The alerting B display may be a still image or a moving image including a pictogram, or may be faded in or out in time. Also, the alerting B display may be accompanied by a voice or a warning sound.

  Here, the warning B display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the alerting B display after the end of the hit according to the first embodiment. The alerting B display shown in FIG. 107 (1) displays the message "Let's pay attention to getting stuck". The alert B display may be perceived as unpleasant for the player, but the gaming machine 10 reduces the player's discomfort and the alert effect by limiting the timing of the alert B display. Coexistence with the improvement of the

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (2), the gaming machine 10 may perform caution B display in parallel (for example, overlap) with the probability variation explicit mode rush display. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can give the player an interest in the reminder B display by displaying the reminder B display together with the guidance display for guiding the player to the gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (3), the gaming machine 10 may perform caution B display in parallel (for example, window display) with the probability variation explicit mode rush display.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform warning B display without performing warning A display between timing T14 and timing T16. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 may perform alert A display without performing alert B display between timing T14 and timing T16. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can achieve an alerting effect on either the alert A display or the alert B display. Further, the gaming machine 10 can secure a display time for any one of the alert A display and the alert B display to achieve a further alert effect. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may select either the alert A display or the alert B display based on a predetermined condition. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the alert A display and the alert B display in parallel between timing T14 and timing T16.

  “Ending 1” performs the definite variation explicit mode display from timing T16 to timing T17 (for example, 3000 ms) after the alert call B display. The probability variation explicit mode display accompanied by the decorative symbol is a display indicating that the player is about to enter into the game mode which clearly indicates the probability variation state and that symbol variation will be started soon.

  Here, the definite variation explicit mode display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a game mode effect display with a decorative symbol after the end of a hit according to the first embodiment. The effect display shown in FIG. 108 (1) is the definite variation explicit mode display in “Ending 1” and “Ending 2”. The definite variation explicit mode display includes the mode name in the definite variation explicit mode and the decorative design. The decorative symbol is a symbol combination displayed at the start of symbol variation, and is, for example, a symbol combination (for example, "7", "7", "7") displayed at the time of the hit.

  As described above, “Ending 1” is a definite variation explicit mode rush indication, a company logo indication, a caution A indication, a caution B indication, and a definite variation explicit mode in a period from timing T10 to timing T17 (for example, 25000 ms). And display.

  Further, the rush display of the mode is not limited to the character information, but may be information displayed in association with the rush of the mode (such as a probability change, a short time, a general charge support, etc.). The same applies to the continuous display of the mode. For example, the gaming machine 10 can use a specific character, a background, a symbol, or the like as rush display of the mode or continuous display of the mode. More specifically, when the game machine 10 displays the character of tiger 1 as the rush display of the mode, it suggests the rush to the definite change explicit mode, and when the character of tiger 2 is displayed, the rush to explicit mode In the case of displaying the character of tiger 3, it is possible to suggest entry into the probability variable implicit mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can make the player intuitively feel the entry and continuation of the mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform alert A display or alert B display, or alert A display and alert B display simultaneously with rush display of the mode or continuous display of the mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform efficient status notification and alerting within a limited ending time. For example, when displaying the character of Lion 1 in the odd variation explicit mode rush display, for example, the gaming machine 10 also displays a message "Please be careful not to remove the prepaid card or theft." Can. In addition, when displaying the character of Lion 2 in the definite variation explicit mode continuous display, the gaming machine 10 can also display a message “Please be careful to get stuck” (display alerting B display). In addition, when displaying the character of Lion 3 in the odd variation explicit mode rush display, the gaming machine 10 also sends a message "Please be careful not to remove the prepaid card or theft." "Please be careful" can be displayed. Such a gaming machine 10 can intuitively make the player intuitively feel the entry or continuation of the mode, and can effectively perform a warning.

  Next, the "ending 2" will be described. "Ending 2" is an ending selected at the end of the hit when it is the second and subsequent hits when the hits are continuous among the hits in which there is a probability variation with a probability change after the end of the hit. For example, "Ending 2" is selected at the end of the hit when there is a jackpot 1 or a jackpot 2 when a hit occurs in a gaming state with probability fluctuation or general charge support.

  "ENDING 2" displays the definite variation explicit mode continuation display from timing T10 to timing T16 (for example, 22000 ms). The probability variation explicit mode continuation display is a display indicating to the player that the game mode (probability variation explicit mode) indicating the probability fluctuation state is continued. The probability variation explicit mode continuation display is one form of a guidance display for guiding a player's advantageous gaming state.

  Here, the definite variation explicit mode continuation display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (2) is the probability variation explicit mode continuation display in "Ending 2". The definite variation explicit mode continuation display includes a mode name in the definite variation explicit mode and a display “continuation” which clearly indicates the continuation of the definite variation explicit mode. Note that the display “continuation” is an example of a display that clearly indicates the continuation of the definite variation explicit mode, and may be the display “continue” or the display “nth time (n is the number of continuations)”.

“Ending 2” performs the definite variation explicit mode display from timing T16 to timing T17 (for example, 3000 ms) after the definite variation explicit mode continuation display.
As described above, “ENDING 2” performs the definite variation explicit mode continuation display and the definite variation explicit mode display in a period from timing T10 to timing T17 (for example, 25000 ms). Note that “Ending 2” secures the effect display time allocated to the definite change explicit mode continuation display by not displaying the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display. Although "Ending 2" does not display company logo, alert A, and alert B, it does not stochastically display company logo, alert A, alert B, and alert B. May be performed. In addition, although "Ending 2" does not perform company logo display, alert A display, and alert B display, any of corporate logo display, alert A display, and alert B display May be performed selectively.

  Note that “Ending 2” is set to a period equal to the period in which the probability variation explicit mode continuous display period (from timing T10 to timing T16) includes the probability variation explicit mode rush display, company logo display, alert A display and alert B display. Be done.

  Next, “ending 3” will be described. "Ending 3" is an ending selected at the end of the hit, when there is no probability change after the end of the hit but the common power support comes to a gaming state. For example, "Ending 3" is selected at the end of the hit when the hit is a big hit 3.

  “Ending 3” performs short time explicit mode rush display from timing T10 to timing T16 (for example, 22000 ms). The short time explicit mode rush display is a display indicating to the player that the game mode (time short explicit mode) is entered to clearly indicate that there is no power fluctuation but there is no probability change. The short time explicit mode rush display is one form of a guide display for guiding a player's advantageous gaming state.

  Here, the short time explicit mode rush display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (3) is a time-lapse explicit mode rush display in “Ending 3”. The short-time explicit mode entry display includes a mode name in the short-time explicit mode and a display "entry" that clearly indicates entry into the short-time explicit mode. In addition, a display "rush" is an example of a display which specifies rushing to time saving explicit mode, Comprising: Display "start" etc. may be sufficient.

  “Ending 3” performs the time-saving explicit mode display from timing T16 to timing T17 (for example, 3000 ms) after the time-saving explicit mode rush display. Here, the time-lapse explicit mode display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 108 (2) is the time-saving explicit mode display in "Ending 3". The short time explicit mode display includes a mode name in the short time explicit mode and a decorative pattern. The decorative symbol is a symbol combination displayed at the start of symbol variation, and is, for example, a symbol combination (for example, "8", "8", "8") displayed at the time of the hit.

  As described above, “ENDING 3” performs time-saving explicit mode entry display and time-saving explicit mode display in a period from timing T10 to timing T17 (for example, 25000 ms). In addition, "Ending 3" secures the effect display time allocated to the time-lapse explicit mode rush display by not displaying the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display. Although "Ending 3" does not display company logo, alert A, and alert B, it does not stochastically display company logo, alert A, alert B, and alert B. May be performed. In addition, although "Ending 3" does not perform company logo display, alert A display, and alert B display, any of corporate logo display, alert A display, and alert B display May be performed selectively.

  In addition, “Ending 3” is set to a period equal to the period in which the short-time explicit mode rush display period (from timing T10 to timing T16) includes the probability change explicit mode rush display, company logo display, alert A display and alert B display. Be done.

  Next, “ending 4” will be described. "Ending 4" is an ending selected at the end of the hit when it is not clear whether or not there is a probability change after the end of the hit. For example, "Ending 4" is selected at the end of the hit when the generated hit is a big hit 4 or a small hit.

  The "ENDING 4" performs a probability variation implicit mode entry display from timing T10 to timing T11 (for example, 7000 ms). The probability variation / disapproval mode rush display is a display indicating to the player that a game mode (probability variation / disapproval mode) not indicating the presence or absence of probability fluctuation is entered. The probability variation / disapproval mode rush display is a form of guidance display for guiding a gaming state that may be advantageous to the player.

  Here, the definite variation implicit mode entry display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (4) is the probability variation / disapproval mode rush display in "Ending 4". The definite variation implicit mode entry display includes a mode name in the definite variation implicit mode and an indication "entry" which clearly indicates entry into the definite variation implicit mode. Note that the display “Push” is an example of a display that clearly shows the entry into the definite variation implicit mode, and may be the display “Start” or the like.

  “Ending 4” performs the definite variation implicit mode display from timing T11 to timing T12 (for example, 3000 ms) after the definite variation implicit mode rush display. Here, the probability variation implicit mode display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 108 (3) is a probability variation implicit mode display in "Ending 4". The definite variation implicit indication includes a mode name in the definite variation implicit mode and a decorative pattern. The decorative symbol is a symbol combination displayed at the start of symbol variation, and is, for example, a symbol combination (for example, "1", "2", "3") displayed at the time of the hit.

  As described above, “ENDING 4” performs the definite variation involuntary mode entry display and the definite variation indiscriminate mode display in a period from timing T10 to timing T12 (for example, 10000 ms). Note that “Ending 4” is set to a period in which the probability variation implicit mode entry display period (from timing T10 to timing T11) is shorter than the probability variation explicit mode entry display period (from timing T10 to timing T13). Also, “Ending 4” is a period including the definite variation invisible mode rush display period and the definite variation invisible mode display period (from timing T10 to timing T12) shorter than the definite variation explicit mode rush display period (timing T10 to timing T13) Set to

  Although "Ending 1" displays company logo display, alert A display, and alert B display after the definite variation explicit mode entry display, the display order is an example and can be changed to any order. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the presence or absence of display of company logo display, alert A display, alert B display, or the display order based on predetermined conditions.

  In addition, when one or more of the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display is displayed, the gaming machine 10 may not display the mode. That is, the gaming machine 10 can suggest a mode based on the presence or absence of display of company logo display, alert A display, alert B display, and display order. Such a gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in corporate logo display, alert A display, alert B display, and high advertising effects and alert effects can be expected.

  Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special view controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special view for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special view in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is the special view for this effect It means (decorative design which is not this special figure).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main processing is processing executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply of the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits an interrupt.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit initializes the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit accesses a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and permits generation of display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is processing for setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or uses a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may

  [Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control apparatus 300 (for example, a flag area for effect (storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control apparatus 300)). Save the initial value at power on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect button (the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b) is operated when it is activated. In addition, since the effect button is not turned on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for detecting input of the effect button within the effect button input processing, or may be performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for receiving operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness of the LED and the display device 41 and the volume, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

  [Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is, for example, a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using the rand function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on the specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain random numbers only by executing the rand function. In addition, you may use the counter which increments by "1" like a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100) as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes reception command check processing. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D <b> 24] The control unit performs setting for ending drawing command preparation. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all the commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is ended.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing, the process proceeds to Step D26, and if it is not frame switching timing, it waits for frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to the processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds3333.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing which arrives at a regular interval. The V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds, as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed in a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or 1/30 seconds or less Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

  As a result of the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is performed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. In addition, time management which needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed in units of this frame (that is, in units of the processing cycle). In the case where the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, it becomes 100 ms in 3 frames. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen in accordance with the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form, and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs and the like such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes movable body control processing. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch related information based on the launch state flag, and corresponds to the special view rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)). This is processing for performing mode correction of the effect.

  After performing step D30, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute loop processing (sometimes referred to as main loop processing) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after activation of the effect control device 300.

  The control unit executes the processing of step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processing (in particular, various LEDs and motors) The process of actually outputting the drive control signal etc.) to the port is performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when using an IC specialized for control of various devices, there is also a case where the output of a signal or the like is not performed by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the reception command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a flowchart of reception command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The reception command (rendering command) is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends a rendering command to the rendering control device 300. Are sent sequentially. Below, such data which comprises a command is called data of command or command data.

  Further, the processing of command reception from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of a command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above-mentioned "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking the loaded command data for abnormality, the relevant command Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “store” means to readably store in a predetermined storage area so as to be used for the later control process (the same applies to the following). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. The command buffer is constituted of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311 a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be equal to or more than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in a system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 seconds).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311 a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) (time for one cycle of the above processing cycle).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether the number of received commands is “0 (zero)”. If the number of received commands is not “0”, the process proceeds to Step D43, and the number of received commands is “0”. If there is, the reception command check process is ended. In the present application, “loading data” in the control processing means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311 a in the effect control device 300 of this example) as in the step D41.

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
Here, assuming that A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D41. Then, it is a normal movement that “A = A−B = 0” immediately after execution of step D43, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 interrupts the command reception from the game control device (main substrate) 100. Since the priority is given to the highest priority without disabling the interrupt, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the process in step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process to set the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted, so in step D43, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. I am doing. However, when serial communication is used to transmit / receive a command from the main board as in this embodiment, the value of A is not increased between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153 by disabling interrupts. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be "A.rarw.0".

  [Step D44] The control unit determines the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, command data stored in an address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to a command area (sometimes called a command storage area). The command area is, for example, in a storage area in the RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the control unit reads the data of the command buffer, the update for increasing the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by, for example, 1 in the range of 0 to 31. Do. Here, the range of “0” to “31” corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (ie, whether steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) Do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes reception command analysis processing. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter, referred to as a current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the command reception number has not been completed, and ends the reception command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit separates the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in Step D47 of the received command check process into MODE, and stores the lower byte into ACT. In the case of a variable system command instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands a first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands a second variation pattern It is a thing.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in Step D51 is in the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the value of MODE is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the value of MODE is not in the normal range. Note that the value of MODE is not defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not within the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether the value of ACT separated in Step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the value of ACT is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the value of ACT is not in the normal range.

  Further, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 in step D53 is in the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, separation is performed within the upper limit and the lower limit. It is checked whether the value of ACT is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that it is within the normal range (at this point in time, the missing tooth check described later can not be made).

  [Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of ACT separated from the value of MODE separated is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 if the value of ACT is a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process if the combination is not a correct combination. The determination of whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination can be made, for example, using a match check table. In the match check table, all valid ACT values (action values) for the value of MODE are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each value of MODE. Then, if there is a value of ACT separated in the match check table corresponding to the value of MODE, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no value of ACT separated in the match check table, it is correct It can be determined that it is not a combination.

  The determination as to whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination is executed including a missing tooth check as to whether or not the combination of ACT is a normal combination of ACT. Because there is more than one valid ACT for one MODE, but their values are not continuous (that is, they do not exist discontinuously or have missing values), the command We are comparing and checking if is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, one of them is compared and checked one by one.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the variation system command range. The control unit executes variable system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the variation system command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the data of MODE is not within the variation system command range. .

  Here, the data of MODE is data of MODE stored separately in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A variation system command (also referred to as a variation command or variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and the range that can be taken by data of this variation command is a variation system command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range. The control unit executes big hit system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the data of MODE is not within the big hit system command range. . The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (a display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) relating to a big hit medium effect, and the range which can be taken by the data of the big hit system command is a big hit system command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the symbol system command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the data of MODE is not within the symbol system command range. . A symbol system command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decoration special figure command) is a command for instructing information on a special figure symbol (for example, what to make the stop figure of the special figure, etc.), this symbol command The range that the data of can take is the symbol system command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the one-shot system command range. The control unit executes one-shot system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the one-shot system command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the data of MODE is not within the one-shot system command range. . In addition, unlike a command that makes sense in combination like a symbol command and a variable system command, a command that stands alone is referred to as a one-shot system command. The one-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. The range that can be taken by the data of this one-shot command is the one-shot system command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch symbol system command range. The control unit executes pre-reading symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the pre-reading symbol system command range (step D64), and when the data of MODE is not within the pre-reading symbol system command range Go to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch change command range. The control unit executes the prefetch variation system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the prefetch variation system command range (step D66), and the step is performed when the data of MODE is not within the prefetch variation system command range. Go to D67. The pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading fluctuation system command are commands for pre-reading effect.

  Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to start winning memory (no start winning memory hold or just hold) for which the variable display game of the special drawing is not executed. In order to inform the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability whether or not it will be a big hit when it is subsequently executed (or what fluctuation pattern it will be), the display of start winning memory storage etc. And so on. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the retention of the starting winning a prize memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

  [Step D67] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the special figure game system command range. The control unit executes the special figure game system command processing when the data of MODE is within the special figure game system command range (step D68), and the received command when the data of MODE is not within the special figure game system command range End analysis processing. In addition, a special figure game type | system | group command is a command regarding advancing of a special figure game. For example, the special drawing game command includes a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a special winning opening open n-th command, an interval command, an ending command, and the like. The special figure game command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure game system command processing]
Next, special view game command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure game system command processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The special figure game command process is a process executed by the control unit in step D68 of the received command analysis process.

  [Step D71] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is a customer waiting demo command. The control unit executes the customer waiting demo setting process when the data of MODE is the customer waiting demonstration command (step D72), and proceeds to step D73 when the data of MODE is not the customer waiting demonstration command. The customer waiting demo setting process is a process of setting the contents of the effect during the customer waiting demonstration.

  [Step D73] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is a fanfare command. The control unit executes the fanfare setting process when the data of MODE is the fanfare command (step D74), and proceeds to step D75 when the data of MODE is not the fanfare command. In addition, a fanfare setting process is a process which sets the presentation content in fanfare.

  [Step D75] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is the n-th large winning opening opening command. The control unit executes the large winning a prize opening open nth setting process when the data of MODE is the special winning opening open nth command (step D76), and when the data of MODE is not the special winning opening open nth command, step Go to D77. In addition, the special winning opening open n-th setting process is a process for setting the effect content of the special winning opening open n-th time, that is, in a round.

  [Step D77] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is an interval command. The control unit executes interval setting processing when the data of MODE is an interval command (step D78), and proceeds to step D79 when the data of MODE is not an interval command. In addition, an interval setting process is a process which sets the content of an effect during an interval, ie, between rounds.

  [Step D79] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is the ending command. The control unit executes the ending setting process when the data of MODE is the ending command (step D80), and ends the special figure game command processing when the data of MODE is not the ending command. The ending setting process is a process of setting the contents of effect during ending, that is, the contents of effects from ending 1 to ending 4 shown by using FIG. The ending setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Ending setting process]
Next, ending setting processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending setting processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The ending setting is a process executed by the control unit in step D80 of the special figure game command processing.

  [Step D81] The control unit determines whether the data of ACTION is ending 1 or not. The control unit executes ending 1 setting processing when the data of ACTION is ending 1 (step D 82), and proceeds to step D 83 when the data of ACTION is not ending 1. The ending 1 setting process is a process of setting the effect contents (see FIG. 103) in the ending 1.

  [Step D83] The control unit determines whether the data of ACTION is the ending 2 or not. The control unit executes the ending 2 setting process when the data of ACTION is the ending 2 (step D84), and proceeds to step D85 when the data of the ACTION is not the ending 2. The ending 2 setting process is a process of setting the effect content (see FIG. 103) in the ending 2.

  [Step D85] The control unit determines whether the data of ACTION is ending 3. The control unit executes an ending 3 setting process when the data of ACTION is the ending 3 (step D86), and proceeds to step D87 when the data of the ACTION is not the ending 3. The ending 3 setting process is a process of setting the effect contents (see FIG. 103) in the ending 3.

  [Step D87] The control unit determines whether the data of ACTION is the ending 4. The control unit executes the ending 4 setting process when the data of ACTION is the ending 4 (step D88), and ends the ending setting process when the data of the ACTION is not the ending 4. The ending 4 setting process is a process of setting the effect content (see FIG. 103) in the ending 4.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can set the content of the effect during ending. In the game machine 10, the ending type is set according to the data of ACTION received from the game control apparatus 100 by the effect control apparatus 300. That is, although the gaming machine 10 determines whether or not to include the alerting display in the ending by the gaming control apparatus 100, the presentation control apparatus 300 may determine it. For example, the game control device 100 determines that the ending 1 and the ending 2 are common ACTION data, and the effect control device 300 determines whether to include a warning display in the ending based on a predetermined condition (for example, command reception history) It may be one.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300). The control unit performs a first hit (big hit 3) in which the first gaming state (low probability state) is reached after the end of the hit (big hit) operation, and a second advantage that is more advantageous than the first playing state after the end of the hit operation. It is possible to generate a second hit (one big hit or two big hits) to be in the gaming state (high probability state). The control unit performs the first ending control when the second hit occurs in the first state (per the first time), and the second hit in the second state (continuous hit) different from the first state. When it occurs, the second ending control is performed. The first ending control includes a warning about the play of the game in the second hitting ending period. The second ending control does not include the warning about the game intruding in the second hitting ending period.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes the display device 41 capable of displaying the progress of the game, and the control unit causes the display device 41 to display a reminder regarding the game's stagnation.
(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) or (2) includes the voice output device (speakers 19a and 19b), and the control unit causes the voice output device to output an alert regarding the game intruding.

(4) In the ending period of the second hit, the control unit of (1) warns the user about the play of the game after guiding the player to be in the second gaming state.
(5) The control unit of (1), during the second hitting ending period, performs a call for attention regarding the game intruding while being guided to be in the second game state (overlapping of alerting or alerting) Window display).

(6) The first ending control of (1) further includes, in the ending period of the second round, a warning regarding withdrawal of the prepaid card.
(7) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a game control unit that controls the game in an integrated manner, and an effect control unit that performs effect control based on an instruction of the game control unit.

(8) In the gaming machine 10 of (7), the effect control unit performs the first ending control and the second ending control based on the first state and the second state determined by the game control unit. .
(9) In the gaming machine 10 of (7), the effect control unit determines the first state and the second state, and performs the first ending control and the second ending control.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, in the point of evaluating the amount of play of the player and alerting about the concentration of the game, the first embodiment warns about the concentration of the game in the ending 1 regardless of the amount of the gaming of the player. It differs from the embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 warns on the display screen of the display device 41. First, a display screen without warning display will be described with reference to FIG. 114, and then a display screen with warning display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen without a warning display in the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen with a reminder display in the display device of the second embodiment.

  In the display screen 700, the display contents include the decorative symbols 701, 702, 703, the reserve digest display 704, the reserve display 705, the special view 1 reserve number display 706, the special view 2 reserve number display 707, and the continuous game time Includes a display 708. The display screen 700 indicates that the decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703 are changing, and indicates that the corresponding special view change display game is in the change display state. The holding and digest display 704 can indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode. The hold display 705 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view variable display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The special figure 1 reservation number display 706 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 707 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 705 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 706 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 707. For example, when the special figure 1 pending number display 706 displays “4” and the special figure 2 pending number display 707 displays “4”, the pending display 705 displays the number of pending storages by the eight circular icons. Indicates "8".

  Incidentally, the special figure 1 reserve number display 706 and the special figure 2 reserve number display 707 are displayed at a position which does not enter the blind spot of the player even by the operation of the board effect device 44 or the game ball rolling on the front side. , Clearly indicate the number of pending storages to the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the degree of freedom of the display mode of the hold display 705 while ensuring that the number of held memories is always indicated to the player.

  Further, the continuous game time display 708 displays the time during which the player is playing continuously. For example, the display screen 700 displays “55:00” as the continuous game time display 708, and indicates that the player has played continuously for 55 minutes. The continuous game time display 708 is an example of the game amount indication function by the player, and is not limited to the game time, and the number of bullets in the game ball, the number of out ball entry, the number of winning hole prizes, the number of prize balls, etc It may be the number of times of variation display etc., or it may be an evaluation value etc. calculated by one or more parameters.

  In the display screen 700a, the display contents include the decorative symbols 701, 702, 703, the reserve digest display 704, the reserve display 705, the special view 1 reserve number display 706, the special figure 2 reserve number display 707, and the continuous game time A display 708 and a warning display 709 are included. For example, the display screen 700a displays "60:00" as the continuous game time display 708, and indicates that the player has played continuously for 60 minutes. The display screen 700 a displays a warning display 709 when the continuous game time display 708 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 60 minutes). The alert display 709 includes content that calls attention to excessive intrusiveness in the game, and displays, for example, a message "Let's pay attention to intrusiveness". The message displayed by the alert display 709 is an example of the alert display, and may be, for example, detailed game guidance, a caution note, a pictogram, a moving image, or the like.

  The display screen 700 a is displayed such that the warning display 709 is positioned at the forefront among the display elements on the display screen 700 a. For example, the display screen 700 a displays a warning display 709 as superimposed on the decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703. As a result, the gaming machine 10 secures the alerting effect to the player by the alerting display 709. In addition, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the alert display 709 by superimposing the alert display 709 on the decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703 which the player observes with normal attention.

  In addition, the display screen 700 a displays a warning display 709 at a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the special view 1 hold count display 706 and the special view 2 hold count display 707. As a result, the gaming machine 10 takes care so that the player does not suffer an unexpected disadvantage for the progress of the game. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 actively displays overlapping display elements (for example, decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703) with display elements on the display screen 700a (for example, the reserve digest display 704). , Hold display 705) and display elements which are not permitted to overlap (for example, the special view 1 hold count display 706, the special view 2 hold count display 707) are set. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can change the display position and size of the alert display 709 while achieving both the protection of the player's profit and the improvement of the alerting effect. By changing the display position and size of the alerting display 709, the gaming machine 10 can further improve the alerting effect.

  The alert display 709 may be displayed in a range during the variable display period (up to symbol determination), or may be displayed across a plurality of variable display periods. The alert display 709 may be hidden after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), or a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, touch non-detection or selection button switch 25a, It may be displayed until the operation detection by the player such as the determination button switch 25b). The gaming machine 10 can detect that the player has confirmed the alert display by the operation detection by the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 may add a guidance for the confirmation operation to the display content in order to prompt the player to perform the confirmation operation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide a benefit (for example, a special voice output or a display output) to the confirmation operation to further prompt the player to perform the confirmation operation.

[Caution alerting process]
Next, warning processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a flowchart of alerting processing in the effect control device of the second embodiment. The alerting process is a process of determining whether or not to display the alerting display 709 on the display screen 700. The alerting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process independently of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D91] The control unit acquires the alert setting. The alert setting is prepared in advance as a default setting, but may be updated by a game arcade, a player, or the like. For example, the control unit can update the alert setting according to the input content received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. The alert setting includes the setting of enabling / disabling of alerting.

  [Step D92] The control unit refers to the alert setting and determines whether the alert is valid. The control unit proceeds to step D93 when the alerting is effective. On the other hand, when the alerting is not effective, the control unit proceeds to step D91 and waits for the alerting to become effective.

  [Step D93] The control unit determines whether or not the game start by the player has been detected. The control unit proceeds to step D94 when the game start is detected, and proceeds to step D91 when the game start is not detected. For example, the control unit can receive notification of touch detection from the game control device 100 and detect the start of the game by the player.

  [Step D94] The control unit initializes the amount played by the player. The game amount is a measure of the degree of immersion of the player, and is, for example, the continuous game time of the player. The control unit resets the continuous game time display 708 displayed by the display screen 700 to “0:00 (0 minutes)”.

  [Step D95] The control unit sets an alerting condition. The alerting condition is a condition for alerting. The gaming machine 10 sets one warning condition selected according to the setting condition out of a plurality of warning conditions, but may set only one warning condition at all times.

  Here, the alerting condition will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of the alerting condition of the second embodiment. There are three alerting conditions that can be set by the gaming machine 10. The alerting condition shown in (1) is an alerting condition selected in the state where no big hit has occurred since the power was turned on, and the condition for alerting when the continuous game time display 708 reaches 60 minutes is set as the condition. The message content is "Let's keep a moderate game in mind". Also, the alerting condition shown in (2) is an alerting condition selected when the previous hit type is big hit 1, big hit 2, or big hit 3, and the continuous game time display 708 becomes 60 minutes. The condition of alerting is set as “It is important to pay attention”. Furthermore, the alerting condition shown in (3) is an alerting condition to be selected when the previous hit type is a big hit 4 or a small hit, and when the continuous game time display 708 reaches 60 minutes. It is a condition to call attention, and the message content is "Please take a break because it is not a good wave."

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can set alerting conditions and message contents according to the gaming state. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can alert the user with a timing and a message in consideration of the state of the player.

  [Step D96] The control unit determines whether the player is continuing the game. If the control unit determines that the player continues the game, it proceeds to step D97, and if it determines that the player does not continue the game, it proceeds to step D91. For example, the control unit can receive notification of touch detection from the game control device 100 and detect the continuation of the game by the player. As described above, the gaming machine 10 monitors the continuity of the game and assumes that the player has taken a break or the player has been replaced when the continuity of the game is lost.

[Step D97] The control unit updates the amount played by the player. For example, the control unit updates the continuous game time display 708 according to the elapsed time from the game amount initialization.
[Step D98] The control unit determines whether a warning condition is satisfied (for example, the game amount has exceeded a predetermined threshold). The control unit proceeds to step D96 when the alerting condition is not established, and waits for the alerting condition to be established. On the other hand, when the alerting condition is satisfied, the control unit proceeds to step D99.

  [Step D99] The control unit sets a warning (flag) in response to the satisfaction of the warning condition. After setting the alerting, the control unit proceeds to step D91 to prepare for the next alerting.

  In the step D91, the gaming machine 10 may update the alert setting at random according to the predetermined event detection such as the power on detection of the gaming machine 10. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can set the alerting timing for the player to a timing that is surprising. Further, when gaming machines of the same type are installed adjacent to each other, the gaming machine 10 can make the alerting timing different even with the same amount of gaming.

  In addition, although the gaming machine 10 detects the game start on the basis of the touch detection in step D93, it detects the game start by a predetermined command (for example, a change system command or a hold system command) received from the game control apparatus 100. It is also good. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may detect the start of gaming based on the detection of a player by an output signal from an infrared sensor or a video signal captured by a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) camera.

  Further, although the gaming amount initialized in step D94 is used as the gaming time, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to this as long as the gaming amount of the player can be evaluated. For example, the gaming machine 10 can use the variable display count, the number of bullets, the number of winning balls, a predetermined table value, and the like as the gaming amount. In addition, when updating the game amount, the gaming machine 10 may weight the update value according to the predetermined condition. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set a 10-minute game in the gaming state without probability change as the game amount “10”, and can set a 10-minute game in the gaming state with probability change as the game amount “1”. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player with the game amount in accordance with the player's feeling.

  In addition, although the gaming machine 10 determines the game continuation in step D96 based on the touch detection, even if the game continuation or the game interruption is detected by a predetermined command (for example, a customer wait command) received from the game control apparatus 100 Good. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may detect a game interruption by regarding a predetermined gaming state (for example, a gaming state that is advantageous to a player such as a big hit, probability fluctuation, or general power support) as a game interruption. That is, the gaming machine 10 may set the game amount in the game state which is disadvantageous for the player as the game amount update target. In this case, the gaming machine 10 can set in advance which gaming state is advantageous / convenient for the player, or by the game arcade or the player.

  In the gaming machine 10, the gaming amount exceeds the predetermined threshold as an example of the fulfillment of the predetermined condition in step D98, but instead, it may be lottery determination in which the lottery probability fluctuates depending on the gaming amount. For example, the gaming machine 10 can determine the establishment of the caution condition with low probability when the gaming amount is small, and can determine the establishment of the caution condition with high probability when the gaming amount is large.

[Caution alerting processing]
Next, cautionary edit processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a flowchart of alerting edit processing in the effect control device of the second embodiment. The alerting editing process is a process of updating the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the alerting (flag) set in the alerting process. The alerting editing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop of step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D101] The control unit determines whether a warning (flag) is set. The control unit proceeds to step D102 when the attention (flag) is set, and ends the attention editing process when the attention (flag) is not set.

[Step D102] The control unit sets the position and size of a message window displaying a warning message.
[Step D103] The control unit acquires a message included in the alerting condition.

  [Step D104] The control unit updates the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) so as to display a message window for displaying a message for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

  [Step D105] The control unit, upon receiving the update of the effect display editing content, resets the warning (flag). After resetting the warning, the control unit ends the warning editing process.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can include the alert display 709 on the display screen 700a. Although the gaming machine 10 updates the effect display edit content based on the set of alert (flag), the effect display edit content is generated based on the set of alert (flag) in the effect display editing process. May be

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, a modified example 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The first modification of the second embodiment is different from the second embodiment in which the alert display 709 is displayed superimposed on another display element on the display screen 700 a in that the alert display is performed by replacing the display element. Do.

  First, a warning display performed by replacing messages (including words) displayed on the display screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen with a warning display by message replacement in the display device of the modified example 1 of the second embodiment.

  The display screen 700b shown in (1) is an example of a predetermined effect display without a warning display. The display screen 700b includes the continuous game time display 708, the message display 710b, and the character display 711b in the display content. The display screen 700b displays a dialogue "chance?" (Message display 710b) in a message field (balloon) attached to a character such as a tiger (character display 711b).

  On the other hand, the display screen 700c shown in (2) is an example of a predetermined effect display having a warning display. The display screen 700c follows the effect display edit content updated in the alert edit processing, with respect to the effect display edit content corresponding to the display screen 700b. The display screen 700c includes the continuous game time display 708, the alert display 709c, and the character display 711c in the display content. The display screen 700c displays a message "Please be careful to get stuck" (reminder display 709c) in a message field (balloon) attached to a character such as a lion (character display 711c).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting display by updating a message that is one of the display elements for the effect display editing content. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting display by updating the character which is one of the display elements for the effect display editing content. In the display screen 700c, although both the message and the character are updated on the display screen 700b and alerting display is performed, either may be used. The gaming machine 10 may use a message or character in a bustling effect (effect not related to the reliability notification of the special drawing game) which is usually performed in the display effect, a reach effect, etc. (related to the notification of the reliability of the special drawing game) Message or character in the presentation).

  Next, a warning display performed by replacing the background displayed on the display screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen with a warning display by background replacement in the display device of the modified example 1 of the second embodiment.

  The display screen 700d shown in (1) is an example of a predetermined effect display without a warning display. The display screen 700d includes the hold display 705, the continuous game time display 708, and the background display 712 in the display content. The display screen 700 d displays a background (background display 712) including numbers (for example, “1”, “2”, “3”,...) Corresponding to each hold (hold display 705).

  On the other hand, the display screen 700e shown in (2) is an example of a predetermined effect display having a warning display. The display screen 700 e follows the effect display edit content updated in the alert edit processing, with respect to the effect display edit content corresponding to the display screen 700 d. The display screen 700e includes, as display contents, a hold display 705e, a continuous game time display 708, and a reminder display 709e. The display screen 700e displays a background (reminder display 709e) including a message "Warning about swallowing" instead of the number corresponding to each hold (hold display 705e). Further, the display screen 700e supports attention of the player's attention alert display 709e by changing the display mode of the hold display 705 to the display mode of the hold display 705e.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting display by updating the background which is one of the display elements for the effect display editing content. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting display by updating the hold display which is one of the display elements for the effect display editing content. In the display screen 700e, although both of the background and the hold display are updated on the display screen 700d to perform the alert display, one of them may be displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be linked to the prefetching effect to perform the change of the display mode to the hold display 705e and the display of the alert display 709e. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can further support the attention of the player's attention display 709e.

[Caution alerting processing]
Next, the cautionary editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a flowchart of alerting edit processing in the effect control device of the modification 1 of the second embodiment. The alerting editing process is a process of updating the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the alerting (flag) set in the alerting process. The alerting editing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop of step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D111] The control unit determines whether a warning (flag) is set. The control unit proceeds to step D112 when the attention (flag) is set, and ends the attention editing process when the attention (flag) is not set.

  [Step D112] The control unit determines whether an alert can be issued. The control unit proceeds to step D113 when the alert can be issued, and ends the alert editing process when the alert can not be issued. The control unit sets in advance the timing at which the alert can occur and the gaming state, or the timing at which the alert can not occur and the gaming state, and determines whether or not the alert can be issued based on the contents of the setting. For example, the normal gaming state is set as a state capable of alerting, and the error state is set as a state not capable of alerting. Further, the timing at which the effect display editing content is updated in time is set as the timing at which the alert can be issued, and the timing at which the update of the effect display editing content is not in time is set as the timing at which the alert is not possible. For example, the timing to determine whether the effect display editing content is in time is set in advance for each fluctuation pattern.

  [Step D113] The control unit selects a replacement item from among the effect display editing content. The replacement item is a display element in the display screen, and includes, for example, a background, a character, a message (serif), a window, and the like. The selection of replacement items is based on a predetermined selection rule.

  [Step D114] The control unit selects, for the selected replacement item, the replacement content to be the alert display. For example, when replacing the background A, the control unit selects either of the background B and the background C as options. The selection of replacement content is based on a predetermined selection rule.

  [Step D115] The control unit updates the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main processing) with the selected replacement content for the selected replacement item.

  [Step D116] The control unit resets the warning (flag) in response to the update of the effect display editing content. After resetting the warning, the control unit ends the warning editing process.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can include a warning display on the display screen. Although the gaming machine 10 updates the effect display edit content based on the set of alert (flag), the effect display edit content is generated based on the set of alert (flag) in the effect display editing process. May be

Modification 2 of the Second Embodiment
Next, a second modification of the second embodiment will be described. The second modification of the second embodiment is the same as the first modification of the second embodiment in that the display element is replaced to perform alerting display, but the second embodiment is in that the replacement target is limited. This is different from the first modification of the second embodiment.

  First, a warning display performed with a limited replacement target will be described using FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen with a warning display by message replacement in the display device of the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

  The display screen 700f shown in (1) is an example of a predetermined effect display without a warning display. The display screen 700f includes the continuous game time display 708, the message display 710f, and the character display 711f in the display content. The display screen 700 f displays a dialogue “chance?” (Message display 710 f) in a message column (balloon) attached to a character (character display 711 f) such as a tiger. Here, the speech "chance?" Indicates that the notification of the reliability (reliability notification) in which the result of the symbol variation will be hit will be announced.

  The display screen 700g shown in (2) is an example of a predetermined effect display without a warning display displayed subsequently to the display screen 700f. The display screen 700g includes the continuous game time display 708, the message display 710g, and the character display 711g in the display content. The display screen 700g displays a dialogue "Cold ne ..." (message display 710g) in a message field (balloon) attached to a character such as a pig (character display 711g).

  That is, the display screen 700g shows how the character display 711g responds to the call of the character display 711f on the display screen 700f. Here, the words "cold" ... indicate that the reliability to be notified is low. Further, the appearance of the character display 711g indicates that the reliability to be notified is low.

  On the other hand, the display screen 700h shown in (3) is an example of a predetermined effect display without a warning display displayed following the display screen 700f. The display screen 700h includes the continuous game time display 708, the message display 710h, and the character display 711h in the display content. The display screen 700h displays a dialogue "HEAT LIKE !!!" (message display 710h) in a message field (balloon) attached to a character such as a lion (character display 711h).

  That is, the display screen 700h shows how the character display 711h responds to the call of the character display 711f on the display screen 700f. Here, the message "Heat !!!" indicates that the reliability to notify is high. Also, the appearance of the character display 711h indicates that the reliability to notify is high.

  Thus, after displaying the display screen 700f, the gaming machine 10 enhances the interest of the game by displaying the display screen 700g or the display screen 700h. In general, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a higher positive rating for the display screen 700 h than the display screen 700 g. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a more favorable rating for the character display 711 h than for the character display 711 g.

  The display screen 700i shown in (4) follows the effect display editing content updated by the alerting editing process for the effect display editing content corresponding to the display screen 700h. The display screen 700i includes the continuous game time display 708, the alert display 709i, and the character display 711h in the display content. The display screen 700i displays a message "Please pay attention to the entanglement" (reminder display 709i) in a message field (balloon) attached to a character such as a lion (character display 711h).

  That is, the display screen 700i replaces the line to which the character display 711h responds while using the character display 711h on the display screen 700h as it is. Here, the words "please pay attention" indicate that the player should be alerted.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 may use the character display 711h as it is and replace the words to which the character display 711h responds so as to clearly indicate to the player the degree of reliability to be notified and the alerting. it can. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can convert negative emotions that the player may hold against the display of reminders into positive emotions. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform display with a high alerting effect. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can perform a display with a high alerting effect by updating the message, which is one of the display elements, for the effect display editing content in association with the game progress.

  In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the message "Please pay attention to the conviction" (reminder display 709i) as a response to the message "chance?" (Message display 710f), the notice 709i is notified of the notification 709i A notification function can be provided. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the possibility that the player misses the warning display 709i, and can enhance the warning effect.

  Note that the replacement of the message in the alerting is an example of alerting notification, and may be another display element such as a background or a character, or may be an audio replacement.

[Caution alerting processing]
Next, the warning edit processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a flowchart of alerting edit processing in the effect control device of the modification 2 of the second embodiment. The alerting editing process is a process of updating the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the alerting (flag) set in the alerting process. The alerting editing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop of step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D121] The control unit determines whether a warning (flag) is set. The control unit proceeds to step D122 when the attention (flag) is set, and ends the attention editing process when the attention (flag) is not set.

[Step D122] The control unit acquires the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process).
[Step D123] The control unit determines whether or not there is a specific effect (specific effect) in the acquired effect display editing content. The control unit proceeds to step D124 when there is a specific effect in the effect display editing content, and ends the alert edit processing when there is no specific effect. The specific effect is an effect related to the reliability degree notification, and corresponds to, for example, a dialogue “hot good !!!” (message display 710 h) on the display screen 700 h. Note that whether or not the effect included in the effect display editing content is a specific effect is set in advance for each effect.

  [Step D124] The control unit selects replacement content (reminder display) corresponding to the specific effect. For example, in the case of replacing the speech “hot good !!!” (message display 710 h), the control unit selects the speech “please pay attention to the intrusion” (alert display 709 i).

[Step D125] The control unit updates the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing processing (step D23 of the main processing) with the selected replacement content.
[Step D126] In response to the update of the effect display editing content, the control unit resets a warning (flag). After resetting the warning, the control unit ends the warning editing process.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can include a warning display on the display screen. Although the gaming machine 10 updates the effect display edit content based on the set of alert (flag), the effect display edit content is generated based on the set of alert (flag) in the effect display editing process. May be

  Next, the specific effects to be replaced and the contents of replacement will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a view showing an example of a specific effect to be replaced in the second modification of the second embodiment and an example of replacement content.

  The gaming machine 10 has several specific effects to be replaced. The specific effect is prepared for each replacement item. For example, the substitute item cut-in is a screen to be inserted (cut-in) into the display screen, and the dialogue "super heat !!!" is displayed. The dialogue "Heavy fever !!!" is a subject of replacement, and is replaced by the alert display "Let's pay attention to the entanglement !!!". In addition, the replacement item serif displays the serif “heat good !!!” in the display screen. The dialogue "Akanai!" Is an object to be replaced, and can be replaced by a warning display "Be careful to get stuck".

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 replaces the specific effect included in the effect display editing content with the replacement content. The gaming machine 10 provides the same effect as the high reliability is set to the alert display by making the specific effect set to the high reliability the replacement target. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the alert display. For example, even if the gaming machine 10 does not display a reminder, the player usually expects the appearance of a reminder. Therefore, such a gaming machine 10 will have a very high alerting effect.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the second embodiment will be described. The third modification of the second embodiment is different from the first modification of the second embodiment in which the effect display editing content after generation is updated in that the alert display is included when the effect display editing content is generated.

  In the third modification of the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 replaces the editing item option used when generating the effect display editing content. Here, Figure 125 shows editing item options when alerting (flag) is not set (when alerting is reset) and editing item options when alerting (flag) is set (when alerting is set). It demonstrates using. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of editing item options at alerting reset and an editing item option at alert setting according to the third modification of the second embodiment.

  The edit item option at alert reset shown in (1) is an option for effect contents about cut-in which is one of the edit items in the effect display edit content, and corresponds to a specific variation pattern at alert reset. Do. The edit item options at the time of alert reset are "-", "chance!", "Big chance !!" and "excessive heat !!!" in ascending order of reliability. That is, in the gaming machine 10, at the time of alerting reset, the cut-in "-" has the lowest reliability, and the cut-in "severe heat !!!" has the highest reliability.

  The edit item option at the alerting set shown in (2) is an option for the effect contents on the cut-in which is one of the editing items in the effect display editing content, and corresponds to a specific variation pattern at the alerting set Do. The edit item options at the time of alert set include “-”, “Chance!”, “Great Chance !!”, and “Let's pay attention to !!!” in ascending order of reliability. That is, at the time of alert reset, the gaming machine 10 has the lowest reliability for the cut-in "-", and the highest reliability for the cut-in "Let's be careful to get stuck!"

  Such a gaming machine 10 can reduce the amount of processing for alert display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has less restrictions on processing time and processing timing as compared with the case of updating the effect display editing content after generation.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including the modification 1 to the modification 3) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300). The control unit detects the player's continuous game, and the game amount in the continuous game (game time, the number of bullets of the game ball, the number of out-entry balls, the number of winning opening winnings, the number of winning balls, the out-balls Evaluate the number of balls inserted, the number of balls for winning balls, the number of fluctuation display, the evaluation value etc. calculated with one or more parameters, etc. Call out.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) changes the threshold according to a predetermined condition (gaming state, gaming machine performance, setting change, etc.).
(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes the display device 41, and the control unit performs alert display on the display device 41.

(4) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative symbols) is variably displayed, and the control unit performs alert display superimposed on the identification information.
(5) The display device 41 of (3) or (4) can display a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative patterns) is displayed in a variable manner, and the control unit Make a warning display within the range not

  (6) The control unit according to any one of (3) to (5), wherein the plurality of display elements displayed by the display device 41 are display elements overlapping the alerting display while the alerting display is displayed, and It includes a display for alerting and a display element that does not overlap during display.

(7) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative symbols) is variably displayed, and the control unit performs alerting display in the range of one variable display. .
(8) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative symbols) is variably displayed, and the control unit displays alerting display across two or more variable displays. Do.

  (9) The control unit of (3) performs alerting display until predetermined conditions (display time set in advance, detection of game interruption by the player, acceptance of confirmation operation by the player, transition of the gaming state, etc.) are satisfied.

(10) The control unit of (3) performs alerting display until the confirmation operation acceptance by the player, and gives a privilege (special voice output, display output, etc.) to the player based on the confirmation operation acceptance.
(11) When the control unit of (1) detects that the game is interrupted by the player (touch detection, timer monitoring, etc.), it is assumed that the continuity of the game is lost.

(12) The control unit of (1) makes it possible to change the alerting conditions (continuous game determination condition, threshold, alerting time, presence or absence of alerting, etc.) based on the gaming state.
(13) The control unit of (1) makes it possible to change the alerting mode (display only, audio only, combined display and voice, alerting time, alerting content, etc.) based on the gaming state.

(14) The control unit of (1) makes it possible to change the alerting mode (display only, audio only, combined display and voice, alerting time, alerting content, etc.) based on the gaming state.
(15) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and the control unit relates to reliability notification displayed in the variable display game Of the display elements and the display elements not related to the reliability notification, the alert display is performed in relation to the display elements not related to the reliability notification (for example, replacement to background display including alert display, alert display Replacement to lively production including

  (16) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and the control unit relates to reliability notification displayed in the variable display game Of the display elements and the display elements not related to the reliability notification, the alert display is performed in relation to the display element related to the reliability notification (for example, from the cut-in including the reliability notification to the cut-in including the alert display) And replacement of messages that include notification of reliability to messages that include reminders).

  (17) The control unit of (16) sets the second display element related to the reliability notification to the reliability notification display, excluding the first display element related to the reliability notification as a replacement target of the reliability notification display. It is set as a substitution target (for example, substitution of words to which the character display 711 h responds while using the character display 711 h on the display screen 700 h as it is).

(18) The control unit of (1) has an advance notice function for alerting (for example, the alert display 709i is displayed as a response to the message display 710f).
(19) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative symbols) is variably displayed, and the control unit is a specific effect for which high reliability is set in the variable display game Replace with the advance notice.

  (20) The display device 41 of (3) is capable of displaying a variable display game in which identification information (such as decorative symbols) is variably displayed, and the control unit includes alerting as a choice when alerting is not performed. The effect is selected from among the first effect options that are not present, and the effect is selected from the second effect options including alerting to the option when alerting is performed.

(21) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a voice output device (speakers 19a and 19b), and the control unit causes the voice output device to output an alert regarding the game stagnation.
Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first and second embodiments in that the alert display is performed based on the operation of the option setting unit 25. Hereinafter, in the third embodiment, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or PB (Push Button).

  First, connection of the effect control device 300 of the third embodiment and the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example connection of the effect control device of the third embodiment and the push button.

  The push button 25 includes a push button LED 25 c, a touch sensor 25 d, and a push button SW 25 e. The push button LED 25c is a nine-system full color LED. The touch sensor 25d can detect the player's touch operation at eight locations. The push button SW 25 e can detect the pressing operation of the push button 25.

  The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the push button LED 25 c to the push button 25, and inputs a detection signal of the touch sensor 25 d and a detection signal of the push button SW 25 e from the push button 25.

  Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal of the push button SW 25e. For example, a state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW 25e detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state in which the touch sensor 25d detects a touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW25e detects a press operation on the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b.

  Next, the arrangement of the push button LED 25c and the touch sensor 25d in the push button 25 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary arrangement of push button LEDs and touch sensors in the push button according to the third embodiment.

  The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface, which is the upper surface when the player crawls, is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circular portions 250 to 258 about the size of a fingertip on its upper surface, a small circular portion 250 at the center of the upper surface, and eight on the circumference surrounding the small circular portion 250. Place the two small circles 251-258.

  The small circle portion 250 arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW4) within its circumference. The small circular portion 251 is located in the left direction of the small circular portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW1) within its circumference. The small circle portion 252 is positioned in the upper left direction of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW2) within its circumference. The small circle portion 253 is located in the upper direction of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW3) within its circumference. The small circle portion 254 is positioned obliquely upward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW 5) within its circumference. The small circle portion 255 is positioned to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW 6) within its circumference. The small circle portion 256 is positioned obliquely downward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW7) within its circumference. The small circle portion 257 is located below the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW 8) within its circumference. The small circle portion 258 is positioned diagonally downward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c within its circumference. The small circle portion 258 does not arrange the touch sensor 25d, and therefore, has a star-shaped polygonal design so as to be easily distinguishable from the small circle portions 250-257 in which the touch sensor 25d is arranged. In addition, since the small circle portion 258 does not arrange the touch sensor 25d, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors 25d. When the push button 25 is at the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side, the small circle portion 258 is positioned on the front left side among the small circle portions 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side. , Makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle portion 258 as a home position.

  In the push button 25, the touch sensor 25 d is not disposed in the small circle portion 258, but the touch sensor 25 d may be disposed in the same manner as the small circle portions 250 to 255. Further, the push button 25 may be provided with a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the touch operation of the player instead of the touch sensor 25d. In that case, the effect control device 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

  Next, the display screen at the time of setting an option according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of a display screen at the time of setting an option according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of the display screen at the time of setting an option according to the third embodiment.

  The display screen 720 shown in (1) is one of the customer waiting screens. The display screen 720 includes a customer waiting display 721 and a setting operation guidance display 722. The display screen 720 superimposes a setting operation guidance display 722 on the customer waiting display 721 periodically or irregularly while displaying a customer waiting display 721 for waiting for the player to start the game while displaying a moving image or a still image. The setting operation guide display 722 is an operation guide display regarding option setting, and displays an image of the push button 25 and an operation explanation. The gaming machine 10 shifts to a state where an option can be set by accepting the operation of the push button 25 while the customer waiting screen is displayed.

  The gaming machine 10 can accept the operation of the player by the input from the push button SW 25 e or the touch sensor 25 d of the push button 25 or the combination input of the push button SW 25 e and the touch sensor 25 d. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform operation guidance display for the player by the light emission mode of the push button LED 25c, and can change the light emission mode of the push button LED 25c according to the operation of the player and notify the operation result.

  The display screen 720a shown in (2) is inserted when switching from the customer waiting screen to the option setting screen. The display screen 720 a includes a reminder display 723. The alert display 723 displays a message of a large font "Let's be careful to get stuck" and detailed notes of small font. The gaming machine 10 can alert the player in a calm state before the start of the game or interrupting the game by setting the notification timing of the alert display 723 to the timing of the option setting. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a state in which the player easily accepts alerting, and can achieve both a reduction in the player's discomfort and an improvement in the alerting effect.

  The display screen 720b shown in (3) is one of the option setting screens. The display screen 720 b includes an option setting display 724, a volume setting display 725, a brightness setting display 726, a return display 727, and a setting operation guidance display 722 a. The option setting display 724 clearly indicates that the option can be set. The volume setting display 725 clearly shows the range in which the output volume of the speakers 19a and 19b can be set and the current setting value. The gaming machine 10 outputs sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b at an output sound volume corresponding to the setting operation so that the player can easily confirm the setting contents. The brightness setting display 726 clearly indicates the range in which the brightness of the display device 41, the LED, the lamp and the like can be set, and the current setting value. The gaming machine 10 adjusts the amount of light of the display device 41, the LED, the lamp, and the like with the brightness corresponding to the setting operation, so that the player can easily confirm the setting contents. A return display 727 guides the return from the option setting screen to the customer waiting screen. The setting operation guidance display 722 a displays operation guidance on the option setting screen.

  The display screen 720c shown in (4) is one of the option setting confirmation screens. After accepting the setting end operation on the option setting screen, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen 720c to make the player confirm the setting contents. Display screen 720c includes an option setting confirmation display 724a, a volume setting confirmation display 725a, and a brightness setting confirmation display 726a. The option setting confirmation display 724a clearly indicates the option setting value. The volume setting confirmation display 725a clearly indicates the setting value of the volume setting. The brightness setting confirmation display 726a clearly indicates the setting value of the brightness setting.

  The display screen 720 d shown in (5) is inserted when switching from the option setting screen to the customer waiting screen. The display screen 720 d includes a reminder display 723 a. The alert display 723a displays a message of a large font "Let's pay attention". The gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a calm state before the start of the game or interrupting the game by setting the notification timing of the alert display 723a after the option setting. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a state in which the player easily accepts alerting, and can achieve both a reduction in the player's discomfort and an improvement in the alerting effect.

  The display screen 720 e shown in (6) is one of the customer waiting screens. The display screen 720 e includes a customer waiting display 721. The display screen 720 e displays a customer waiting display 721 for waiting for the player to start playing the game while displaying a moving image or a still image. The display screen 720 e immediately after switching from the option setting screen does not overlap the setting operation guidance display 722.

  The gaming machine 10 displays the display screen 720d after the option setting confirmation display 724a, but may display the display screen 720d when returning to the previous screen (for example, the customer waiting screen) on the display screen 720b. That is, the gaming machine 10 may perform alerting display at one or more transition timings when the display screen related to the option setting transitions. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform alerting display on one or more display screens of a plurality of display screens (for example, option setting displays 724 and 724a) related to the option setting. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the display as long as it is the above-mentioned timing, and may be a warning by voice.

  In addition, when there is a starting winning combination during option setting, the gaming machine 10 gives priority to the variable display game by the display on the display device 41 and cancels the option setting. Next, display and sound output of the display device during option setting will be described according to the presence or absence of the start winning with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of display and audio output of the display device during option setting of the third embodiment.

  First, the display on the display device 41 and the voice output when there is no start winning at the option setting will be described. The gaming machine 10 displays a setting screen (for example, the display screen 720b) on the display device 41 during option setting. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs BGM (BackGround Music) as voice from the speakers 19a and 19b at the time of setting. When the option setting is finished at timing T22, the gaming machine 10 displays a warning screen (for example, the display screen 720d) from timing T22 to timing T24. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an alerting voice (for example, an announcement, a chime, etc.) from the speakers 19a, 19b. The game machine 10 displays the customer waiting screen (for example, the display screen 720e) on the display device 41 after timing T24. At this time, the gaming machine 10 voice-outputs customer waiting BGM from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  Next, the display on the display device 41 and the voice output when there is a start winning combination during the option setting will be described. The gaming machine 10 displays a setting screen (for example, the display screen 720b) on the display device 41 during option setting. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs BGM as voice from the speakers 19a and 19b at the time of setting. If there is a start winning at timing T21 earlier than the alert screen switching timing (timing T22), the gaming machine 10 displays the fluctuation display screen from timing T21. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs a warning sound (for example, "please be careful to get stuck") without immediately outputting the fluctuation display BGM from the speakers 19a and 19b. The gaming machine 10 outputs the fluctuation display BGM from the timing T23 when the output of the alerting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b is finished.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting by voice output even if there is a start winning during option setting and the timing of alerting display is missed. Further, even if such a warning is issued, the gaming machine 10 can display the progress of the variable display game on the display device 41. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both the progress of the variable display game and the alerting.

Modification 1 of Third Embodiment
Next, a first modification of the third embodiment will be described. The first modification of the third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the alert display is performed on the option setting screen. A warning display on the option setting screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen with a warning display at the time of setting an option in a display device of Modification 1 of the third embodiment.

  The display screen 720f shown in (1) is one of the option setting screens. The display screen 720 f includes an option setting display 724 f, a volume setting display 725 f, a brightness setting display 726 f, a warning display 723 f, a return display 727, and a setting operation guidance display 722. The option setting display 724f displays a volume setting display 725f, a brightness setting display 726f, and a warning display 723f in a menu, and clearly indicates that an option can be set. The menu display includes a volume setting display 725f and a brightness setting display 726f as items that can be optionally set, and includes a warning display 723f although it is not an item that can be set as an option. The display screen 720 f highlights the setting item being selected more than the setting item not being selected. For example, the display screen 720f clearly indicates that the volume setting is selected and the brightness setting is not selected by highlighting of the volume setting display 725f and non-emphasis display of the brightness setting display 726f.

  The gaming machine 10 can cyclically select an option included in the menu display, and updates the option based on the operation of the push button 25. A display screen 720 g shown in (2) shows that one option is updated by the push button 25. The display screen 720g clearly indicates that the brightness setting is selected and the volume setting is not selected by highlighting of the brightness setting display 726g and non-highlighting display of the volume setting display 725g.

  When the gaming machine 10 further updates the options based on the operation of the push button 25, the display screen 720g is updated to the display screen 720h shown in (3). The display screen 720h enlarges (highlights) the alert display 723h and clearly indicates that neither the brightness setting nor the volume setting is selected. Note that the display screen 720h may display a reminder display 723 for detailed alerting instead of the alert display 723h. The gaming machine 10 may provide a benefit (for example, a special effect display or an audio output) to the player who has confirmed such detailed alerting. Such a game machine 10 can give the player a positive motivation for alert confirmation.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 alerts at the time of setting options, and changes the display mode of the alert display by the player operation (change from alert display 723f, 723g to alert display 723h), Get a greater alerting effect.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described. The second modification of the third embodiment is different from the first modification of the third embodiment in that alert setting is performed on the option setting screen. Alert setting in the option setting screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen with a caution setting at the time of setting an option in the display device of the modification 2 of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 can cyclically select an option included in the menu display, and updates the option based on the operation of the push button 25. The menu display includes a volume setting display 725i, a brightness setting display 726i, and a warning setting display 728 as options that can be set.

  In the display screen 720i, highlighting setting is selected and the volume setting and the brightness setting are not selected, highlighting of the calling setting display 728 and de-emphasis of the volume setting display 725i and the brightness setting display 726i Express by display.

  The alert setting display 728 can set the degree of alerting (for example, ten stages from gentle to strict) regarding the embedded alert. Note that the alert setting display 728 may enable or disable the alerting, or may enable setting of other settings regarding alerting, such as the frequency of alerting. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 allows the player to change settings in multiple stages, the setting range may be limited to a range permitted by the game arcade. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the setting change in multiple stages according to the output of the RTC 338. For example, the gaming machine 10 may change the setting range in the morning and afternoon, or depending on the day of the week.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the third embodiment will be described using FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. In the third modification of the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 performs alert notification in place of the welcome message. The welcome message is a message that the gaming machine 10 detects from the touch switch signal that the player has started playing, and outputs the voice.

[Welcome message setting process]
First, the welcome message setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a flowchart of welcome message setting processing in the effect control device of the modification 3 of the third embodiment. The welcome message setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The welcome message setting process is executed based on the effect control device 300 receiving a one-shot system command (touch switch ON) from the game control device 100.

  [Step D131] The control unit determines whether or not there is an alert setting, that is, whether or not the alert notification is valid. The control unit proceeds to step D136 when there is an alert setting, and proceeds to step D132 when there is no alert setting.

  [Step D132] Since there is no alert setting, the control unit performs random number lottery in order to output a welcome message of any one of pattern 1 to pattern 3 for which alerting is not performed. The welcome messages of patterns 1 to 3 and patterns 4 to 6 described later will be described later with reference to FIG. The control unit proceeds to step D133 when the extracted random value is in range A, proceeds to step D134 when the extracted random value is in range B, and proceeds to step D135 when the extracted random value is in range C. move on.

[Step D133] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 1 as the effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
[Step D134] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 2 as effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.

[Step D135] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 3 as effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
[Step D136] The control unit refers to the alert level (for example, the alert level described in the second modification of the third embodiment) in the alert setting. The alerting level has 10 levels of 1 to 10, and the control unit proceeds to step D137 when the alerting level is 1 to 4 and proceeds to step D138 when the alerting level is 5 to 7, and alerting When the level is 8 to 10, the process proceeds to step D139.

[Step D137] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 4 as effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
[Step D138] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 5 as effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.

[Step D139] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 6 as effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
Next, welcome messages of patterns 1 to 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of a welcome message of the third modification of the third embodiment.

  The welcome message in the gaming machine 10 is a welcome message from pattern 1 to pattern 3 randomly selected when there is no alert setting, and pattern 4 to pattern selected according to the alert level when there is an alert setting Includes 6 welcome messages.

  In the welcome message of pattern 1, the speech of character A emits a speech “Do your best”. In the welcome message of pattern 2, the speech of character B issues a speech "fight". In the welcome message of pattern 3, the speech of character C emits the line “successful!”. As described above, when the gaming machine 10 detects the start of the game by the player, it issues various welcome messages to improve the interest.

  In addition, the welcome message of pattern 4 is a welcome message selected when the alerting level is 1 to 4, and the voice of the character A issues a speech "Please be careful to get caught". The welcome message of pattern 5 is a welcome message selected when the alerting level is 5 to 7, and the voice of character B emits a speech "Please be careful to get caught". The welcome message of pattern 6 is a welcome message selected when the alerting level is 8 to 10, and the voice of character C emits a speech "Please be careful to get caught". As described above, when the game machine 10 detects the player's game start, the game machine 10 issues a welcome message according to the alert level to alert the player.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, a fourth modification of the third embodiment will be described. The fourth modification of the third embodiment provides a bonus to the player according to the presence or absence of the alert setting. The benefits given to the player by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a view showing an example of a benefit given to the player by the gaming machine of the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 causes a plurality of characters to appear in the game effect and performs various game effects by display and sound. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform reliability notification with the character used for the game effect by associating each character with the reliability of the variable display game in the derivation result mode.

  The gaming machine 10 selects a character to be used for a game effect when there is no alert setting, from (1) From the effect options when there is no alert setting. That is, the gaming machine 10 can select four types of characters of characters A, B, C and D when there is no alert setting, and four stages corresponding to the characters A, B, C and D, or It is possible to perform multi-step reliability notification by combination.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 selects a character to be used for a game effect when there is an alert setting, from (2) an effect option when the alert setting is made. That is, the gaming machine 10 can select six types of characters A, B, C, D, E, F when there is an alert setting, and the characters A, B, C, D, E, F can be selected. It is possible to perform multi-step reliability notification by corresponding 6 steps or a combination of these.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can provide a bonus (for example, variety of game effects, detailed notification of reliability, and the like) to the player by alert setting. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can motivate the player to perform alert setting.

The illustrated benefit is an example, and the gaming machine 10 may expand the variety of other game effects such as background display, voice, BGM, and the like.
[Modification 5 of the third embodiment]
The modification 5 of the third embodiment secures at least a fixed time alert in a continuous game.

[Caution alerting process]
An alerting process for securing an alerting at regular time intervals will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a flowchart of alerting processing in the effect control device of Modification 5 of the third embodiment. The alerting process is a process of determining whether or not to alert. The alerting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process independently of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D141] The control unit clears the monitoring timer. The monitoring timer is a timer for securing attention at every predetermined time, and for example, uses “60 minutes” as the time-up time.

  [Step D142] The control unit determines whether or not a continuous game is in progress. For example, the control unit can determine whether or not the continuous game is in progress based on the touch state notified from the game control device 100. The control unit proceeds to step D143 when in the continuous game, and proceeds to step D141 when the continuous game is not in progress. That is, the control unit resets the monitoring timer (clearing the monitoring timer in step D141) when the continuous game is interrupted.

  [Step D143] The control unit determines whether the monitoring timer has timed out. The control unit proceeds to step D145 when the monitoring timer times out and proceeds to step D144 when the monitoring timers time out.

  [Step D144] The control unit determines whether a monitoring event has been detected. The control unit proceeds to step D145 when a monitoring event is detected, and proceeds to step D142 when a monitoring event is not detected. A monitoring event is an event that triggers a reminder set. For example, the monitoring event includes alert notification by updating the game effect, alert notification when setting an option, and the like.

  [Step D145] The control unit sets an alert (flag) in response to satisfaction of the alert condition (duration of the monitoring timer or detection of a monitoring event). After setting the alerting, the control unit proceeds to step D141 to prepare for the next alerting.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure at least an alert for every predetermined time in a continuous game.
[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
The sixth modification of the third embodiment changes the alerting mode when alerting repeatedly in the continuous game.

  An alerting process for securing an alert at predetermined time intervals will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of the alerting mode according to the alerting repetition number of the sixth modification of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 changes the alerting mode in the case where the continuous game is repeatedly alerted without interruption. The gaming machine 10 selects the alert of pattern 1 in the first (first) alerting, selects the alert of pattern 2 in the second alerting, and alerting the pattern 3 in the third alert or later. Choose

  The alert of pattern 1 displays a message "Let's enjoy a moderate game". The alert of pattern 2 displays the message "Let's take a break moderately". The warning of pattern 3 displays the message "Please pay attention".

  As described above, when the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs alerting, the alerting mode can be changed to appropriately alert the player according to the gaming tendency of the player. The gaming machine 10 may extend the alerting time (for example, change it from 3 seconds to 10 seconds) when alerting repeatedly in the continuous game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the alerting condition (for example, the alerting frequency, the alerting interval, and the like) when the alerting is repeatedly performed without interruption of the continuous game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 reduces the diversity of the game effects (for example, the reduction of the number of characters used for the game effects, the reduction of the movable stages, the voice output, etc., in the case where the continuous game is repeatedly alerted without interruption. Or the reduction of the maximum volume, the reduction of the maximum light quantity of the LED or light, etc.).

[Modification 7 of the third embodiment]
In the seventh modification of the third embodiment, alerting is performed in response to the game effect intervention by the player.

  The alerting triggered by the detection of the game effect intervention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of alerting triggered by detection of game effect intervention of the seventh modification of the third embodiment.

  The display screen 730 shown in (1) is one of the variable display screens. The display screen 730 displays a message (message “press!”) 731 and an image 732 of the push button 25 as operation guide of the push button 25. Thereby, the display screen 730 prompts the player to operate the push button 25 as part of the game effect. The operation of the push button 25 by the player is one mode of the game effect intervention by the player.

  The display screen 730 a shown in (2) is a display screen after the gaming machine 10 receives an operation of the push button 25. Display screen 730 a includes alert display 733. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can alert a game triggered by the game effect intervention by the player. In the case where the game machine 10 changes the progress of the game effect triggered by the game effect intervention by the player, when the game effect with low reliability and the game effect with high reliability are options, the reliability is A high game effect may be displayed on the alert display 733.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can convert negative emotions that the player may hold against the display of reminders into positive emotions. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform display with a high alerting effect.

Modified Example 8 of Third Embodiment
In the eighth modification of the third embodiment, a warning is issued by background scroll display.
A warning by background scroll display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of background scroll display of Modification 8 of the third embodiment.

  The background scroll display 740 shown in (1) is scrolled from the tip position S to the end position E1 as a background on the variable display screen when the gaming machine 10 performs alerting display. The background scroll display 740 scrolls to the right in the figure as a background display of the display screen. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays a part of the background scroll display 740 as the background of the display screen 741. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player by displaying a message “Let's pay attention to sticking!” By the background scroll display 740.

  The background scroll display 740a shown in (2) not only warns the player, but also performs reliability notification. The background scroll display 740a is scrolled from the tip position S to the end position E2 beyond the intermediate position M as a background on the variable display screen when the gaming machine 10 performs alerting display. The middle position M corresponds to the end position E1 of the background scroll display 740, and the background scroll display 740a can perform scroll display similar to the background scroll display 740 by scrolling from the tip position S to the middle position M. . The background scroll display 740 a can alert the player by displaying a message “Let's pay attention to the inset!” By the scroll display from the tip position S to the intermediate position M. In addition, the background scroll display 740a performs the reliability notification (the message "but even before that, a chance!") By scrolling from the intermediate position M to the end position E2.

  Therefore, although the gaming machine 10 displays a part of the background scroll display 740 as the background of the display screen 741a, the display screen 741a warns from the tip position S to the intermediate position M, and the middle position M is displayed. The reliability notification is performed in the range from the end position E2 to the end position E2.

  The gaming machine 10 can produce an expectation for reliability notification after the alerting display to the player by selectively using the background scroll display 740 and the background scroll display 740a when alerting is performed. Such a gaming machine 10 can be expected to have a high effect of making the player pay attention to the alert display.

  It should be noted that the background scroll display 740a is not limited to the reliability notification (message “but even before that chance!”), And various options such as reliability notification (message “super heat !!!”) may be adopted. Good.

  Further, although the gaming machine 10 performs alerting display and reliability notification by the background scroll display 740 and 740a, the gaming machine 10 can be applied to a game effect that arranges alerting and reliability notification in time series. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform message scrolling in a message window, alert notification by voice, or the like, instead of the alert display and the reliability notification by the background scroll display 740, 740a.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 may have a cancel function of canceling (not displaying) the alert display in display by the operation of the push button 25 or the like. Such a cancellation function is frequently used by the player and may damage the attention function. However, the gaming machine 10 can prompt the player to suppress the use of the cancellation function by arranging the alerting and the reliability notification in chronological order, and can suppress the reduction of the alerting effect.

[Modification 9 of the third embodiment]
The modification 9 of the third embodiment performs alert setting based on the embedded self-diagnosis. The embedded self-diagnosis will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the embedded self-diagnosis of the ninth modification of the third embodiment.

  The display screen 750 is a display screen when the embedded self-diagnosis is performed. For example, the gaming machine 10 is embedded in the menu at the time of setting the option, provides self-diagnosis, and displays the display screen 750 when the embedded self-diagnosis function is selected by the menu.

  Display screen 750 includes a self-diagnosis display 751 and an operation guidance display 752. The self-diagnosis display 751 displays questions and answer options in the self-diagnosis. For example, the self-diagnosis display 751 displays a 10-step answer option from the question "hit until losing" and "do not think so" to "think so".

  The gaming machine 10 receives an answer from the player according to the operation guidance display 752 and performs alert setting. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the player who answered "I think so" is more frequently alerted to the player who answered "I think so" than the player who answered "I do not think so" Make call setting. For example, by associating the setting contents with the answer pattern in advance, the gaming machine 10 can perform alert setting corresponding to the answer of the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can call attention along the gaming trend of the player.

  It should be noted that the self-diagnosis of self-diagnosis is one form of the game trend detection function of the player, and the gaming machine 10 is based on the operation situation of the push button 25 (for example, other input information such as frequency and strength of pressing operation). The game trend of the player may be detected.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including the modification 1 to the modification 9) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a reception unit (for example, the push button 25) and a control unit (the game control device 100, the effect control device 300). The reception unit receives an operation (for example, a game effect intervention operation, a setting operation) that does not affect the game result. The control unit alerts the user to the game based on the operation received by the reception unit.

(2) The control unit of (1) calls for a warning regarding the game's stagnation based on the setting operation (for example, volume setting, brightness setting) relating to the effects of the gaming machine 10.
(3) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes the display device 41, and the control unit performs the display for waiting for customers when the setting operation is received in a state where the display for waiting for customers is performed on the display device 41. At the time of switching to, we will warn you about the entanglement of the game.

  (4) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes the display device 41, and the control unit performs the setting display on the display device 41, and when the return operation is accepted, the setting display is changed to the customer waiting display. At the time of switching, a reminder regarding the entanglement of the game is given.

(5) The control unit of (3) or (4) causes the display device 41 to display a warning display.
(6) The gaming machine 10 according to (3) or (4) includes the voice output device (speakers 19a and 19b), and the control unit causes the voice output device to output a reminder regarding the play of the game.

  (7) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes an audio output device (speakers 19a and 19b), and the display device 41 can display a variable display game, and the control unit controls the variable display game during setting display. When is started, the setting display is switched to the display relating to the variable display game, and the voice output device is caused to output an alert regarding the game intruding.

(8) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes the display device 41. The control unit causes the display device 41 to display setting items on the menu, and the menu display includes setting changeable items and a warning display. .
(9) The control unit of (8) gives the player a privilege (for example, a special game effect) when the alert display is selected from the menu display.

  (10) When the alert display is selected from the menu display, the control unit of (8) receives a setting change (for example, the degree, frequency, time, mode, etc. of alert) regarding the alert display.

(11) The control unit of (2) detects the gaming trend of the player, and changes the setting regarding alerting based on the detected gaming trend.
(12) The control unit of (1) is based on a game effect intervention operation (for example, pressing operation of the push button 25 or continuous hitting, selection operation of the game effect, cancellation operation of the game effect, etc.) to intervene in the effect of the gaming machine 10 Call attention to the game's attention.

  (13) The control unit of (12) performs the first alerting (background scroll display 740) for alerting in the predetermined mode, the alerting of the predetermined mode, and the game effect (for example, the reliability regarding the game progress) And second notification (background scroll display 740a) are selectively performed.

(14) The control unit of (13) cancels the first alert and the second alert when the cancel operation is received.
(15) The control unit of (1) changes the alerting mode when repeatedly alerting.

  (16) The gaming machine 10 includes a detection unit (for example, a touch switch signal (touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) and a control unit (the game control apparatus 100, the effect control apparatus 300). Detects the player's gaming state (for example, a game effect intervention operation, setting operation) .The control unit relates to the stagnation of the game based on the player's gaming state (game start, continuation, interruption, etc.) detected by the detection unit Call attention.

(17) The control unit of (16) issues a warning every predetermined time in a continuous game.
Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment uses the RTC 338 to call attention. The gaming machine 10 performs alerting at a timing of alerting that is set in advance, and randomly alerts in a time slot that performs alerting that is set in advance.

[Caution alerting process]
A warning process for calling a warning using the RTC 338 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a flowchart of alerting processing in the effect control device of the fourth embodiment. The alerting process is a process of determining whether or not to alert. The alerting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process independently of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D151] The control unit acquires an alerting schedule. The alerting schedule defines the alerting timing and the alerting time zone. Although a default schedule is prepared in advance, the alerting schedule may be updated by a game arcade, a player or the like. For example, the control unit can update the alerting schedule according to the input content received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. The alerting schedule will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D152] The control unit refers to the alerting timing (alert alerting schedule) and the RTC 338, and determines whether the current time specified from the RTC 338 is the alerting timing. The control unit proceeds to step D157 if the current time is the alert timing. On the other hand, the control unit proceeds to step D153 when the current time is not the alerting timing.

  [Step D153] The control unit refers to the alerting time zone (alert alerting schedule) and the RTC 338, and determines whether the current time specified from the RTC 338 is the alerting time zone. The control unit proceeds to step D154 when the current time is in the alerting time zone. On the other hand, when the current time is not in the alerting time zone, the control unit proceeds to step D151.

  [Step D154] The control unit determines whether or not there is an alerting lottery opportunity. The control unit proceeds to step D155 if it is a reminder lottery trigger, or proceeds to step D151 if it is not a reminder lottery trigger. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the warning lottery timing as the symbol variation start timing once for one symbol variation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may determine the lottery opportunity based on the other gaming amount such as the alerting lottery opportunity every one minute.

  [Step D155] The control unit performs a warning lottery. The lottery probability may be set in advance, or may be set based on the gaming state or the gaming amount. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set a lottery probability of 1/50 for one hour of continuous gaming and set a lottery probability of 1/30 for two hours of continuous gaming.

  [Step D156] The control unit determines whether or not to win the notice lottery. The control unit proceeds to step D157 if the warning lottery is won, and proceeds to step D151 if the warning lottery is not won.

  [Step D157] The control unit sets a warning (flag) in response to the establishment of the warning condition (warning timing or winning of a warning lottery in a warning time slot). After setting the alerting, the control unit proceeds to step D151 to prepare for the next alerting.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can call attention at a preset time, and can call a warning at a preset time zone at an appropriate frequency.
Next, a warning schedule will be described using FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of the alerting timing (alert alerting schedule) and the alerting time slot (alert alerting schedule) according to the fourth embodiment.

  The alerting schedule is stored in a storage unit (for example, the PROM 321, the RAM 322, the FeRAM 323, etc.) of the effect control device 300. The alerting schedule includes alerting timing and alerting time zone. (1) The alerting timing defines four setting timings of timing 1 to timing 4. Each setting timing defines an alerting timing and an alerting mode (including display and / or voice) at the alerting timing. For example, the setting timing “timing 1” defines that the notification timing is “10:00 every day”, and that the notification mode “pattern 1” is to perform the warning. The setting timing “timing 2” defines that every April 1 o'clock every year is the alerting timing, and specifies that alerting is performed in the alerting mode “pattern 2”. The setting timing "timing 3" defines that every Monday to Friday 19:00 is the warning timing, and specifies that a warning mode "pattern 3" is to be used for warning. The setting timing “timing 4” defines that every Saturday and Sunday 15:00 is the alerting timing, and specifies that alerting is performed in the alerting mode “pattern 4”.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a specific alerting mode at a specific date and time. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a different alerting manner depending on time of day, for example, morning, noon, evening, and evening. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a different alerting mode, for example, at the beginning of the month, at the end of the month, on a weekday, or on a holiday, depending on the day of the month. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a different alerting mode depending on, for example, the first day of introduction, one week from introduction, and one week from introduction, depending on the number of days of operation of gaming machine 10. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate alerting according to the installation environment of the gaming machine 10.

  (2) The alerting time zone defines four set time zones from time zone 1 to time zone 4. Each set time zone defines an alerting time zone, a lottery probability, and an alerting mode at the time of winning of the alerting lottery. For example, set time zone "time zone 1" takes 10:00 to 22:00 every day as the alerting time zone, and draws a lottery with lottery probability "1 / 10,000", and alerts the alert mode "pattern 5" at the time of winning Stipulates that The set time zone "Time zone 2" takes 15:00 to 15:30 on May 1 as the alerting time zone, and draws lots with a lottery probability of "1/5", and the alerting mode "pattern 6" at the time of winning Stipulates that the The set time zone "Time zone 3" draws 20:00 to 22:00 of every Monday to Friday as a warning time slot, and draws lots with a lottery probability of "1/200", and a warning mode "pattern 7" at the time of winning It stipulates to call attention. The set time zone "Time zone 4" draws every Saturday and Sunday from 16:00 to 18:00 as a warning time slot, and draws lots with a lottery probability of 1/200, and a warning mode "pattern 8" at the time of winning It stipulates to call attention.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in a specific alerting mode when a predetermined alerting lottery is won on a specific date and time. Such a gaming machine 10 can avoid that two or more gaming machines 10 provided in parallel carry out the same contents of alerting at the same timing when the plurality of gaming machines 10 perform alerting in the game arcade. Further, such a gaming machine 10 can give rarity to the alert itself and give interest to the alert itself by alerting in a specific alert mode. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide a benefit (for example, a special game effect) to a particular alert performed at a specific timing or a specific alert performed by lottery.

Next, some of the alerting modes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of the alerting aspect of the fourth embodiment.
The display screen 760 shown in (1) is one of the alert display screens (a alerting mode) defined by the alert schedule. The display screen 760 includes a message display 761 and a character display 762. For example, the display screen 760 displays a message “Please pay attention to wear! Let's play moderately” as the message display 761 and displays a pig-like character as the character display 762.

  The display screen 760a shown in (2) is one of the alert display screens (a alerting mode) defined by the alert schedule. The display screen 760a includes a message display 761a and a character display 762a. For example, the display screen 760a displays a message "Pay attention to depression! Let's take a break appropriately" as the message display 761a, and display a tiger-like character as the character display 762a.

  The display screen 760b shown in (3) is one of the alert display screens (in alert mode) defined by the alert schedule. The display screen 760 b includes a message display 761 b and a character display 762 b. For example, the display screen 760b displays a message "Pay attention to swallowing! Closing soon, calm down!" As a message display 761b, and display a character such as a lion as a character display 762b.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alerting in the alerting mode according to the date and time by detecting the date and time using the RTC 338. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alerting in an appropriate alerting manner according to the environment in which the player plays a game.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a time acquisition unit (for example, the RTC 338), a plan storage unit (for example, the PROM 321, the RAM 322, the FeRAM 323 and the like), and a control unit (the game control apparatus 100 and the effect control apparatus 300). The time acquisition unit acquires the time in the game (for example, date and time information). The plan storage unit stores an alerting plan (an alerting timing (alert alerting schedule), an alerting time slot (alert alerting schedule)). The control unit alerts the user about the game's involvement based on the time acquired by the time acquisition unit and the alert plan stored by the plan storage unit.

(2) The plan storage unit of (1) stores the alerting timing, and the control unit performs alerting at the alerting timing.
(3) The plan storage unit of (1) stores the alerting time zone, and the control unit performs alerting in the alerting time zone.

(4) The control unit of (3) performs a cautionary lottery in a cautionary time zone, and performs caution when winning the cautionary lottery.
(5) The control unit of (4) performs the alerting lottery with the first lottery probability in the first alerting time zone, and the second lottery different from the first lottery probability in the second alerting time zone Make an alert draw with probability.

(6) The control unit of (1) calls a warning in the warning plan mode corresponding to the warning plan.
Fifth Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, the game control device 100 determines the execution of the alerting and uses the command transmitted to the effect control device 300 to instruct the effect control device 300 to execute the alerting.

  First, warning performed at the time of RAM initialization and at the time of power failure recovery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a view showing an example of a RAM initialization command and a power failure recovery command according to the fifth embodiment.

  The game control device 100 transmits a command for initializing the RAM to the effect control device 300 in step S30 of the main processing (see FIGS. 6 and 7), and transmits a command for recovering power failure to the effect control device 300 in step S25. Do.

  (1) The RAM initialization command indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the time of RAM initialization. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order "1" (command name "model designation"). The command name “model specification” includes MODE “ACH” and one of ACTION “10H” to ACTION “30H” according to the model. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “2” (command name “special figure 1 hold count”). The command name “special figure 1 pending count” includes MODE “A1H” and ACTION “01H” corresponding to no pending. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “3” (command name “special figure 2 hold count”). The command name “special figure 2 pending count” includes MODE “A2H” and ACTION “01H” corresponding to no pending. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “probability information”) in the transmission order “4”. The command name “probability information” includes MODE “A0H” and ACTION “01H” corresponding to the initial state. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “5-1” or the transmission order “5-2” as the transmission order “5” command. For example, the game control apparatus 100 can transmit a command corresponding to the transmission order "5-1" or the transmission order "5-2" according to the setting content. The command name “power on (without alert)” includes MODE “AAH” and corresponding ACTION “55H”. The command name “power on (with alert)” includes MODE “AAH” and corresponding ACTION “AAH”. The effect control device 300 does not perform the alert notification when the RAM initialization command including the command name “power on (without alerting)” is received. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when the RAM initialization command including the command name “power on (with alert)” is received.

  (2) The power failure recovery time command indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the time of power failure recovery. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order "1" (command name "model designation"). The command name “model specification” includes MODE “ACH” and one of ACTION “10H” to ACTION “30H” according to the model. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “2” (command name “special figure 1 hold count”). The command name “special figure 1 pending count” includes one of MODE “A1H” and ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no pending to 4 pending numbers. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “3” (command name “special figure 2 hold count”). The command name “special figure 2 pending count” includes one of MODE “A2H” and ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no pending to 4 pending numbers. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “probability information”) in the transmission order “4”. The command name “probability information” includes one of MODE “A0H” and ACTION “01H” to ACTION “07H” corresponding to various gaming states. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits one of the commands corresponding to the transmission order "5-1" to the transmission order "5-4" as the transmission order "5" command. For example, the game control apparatus 100 can transmit any of the commands corresponding to the transmission order "5-1" to the transmission order "5-4" according to the setting content. The command name “wait for customer demo (without alert)” includes MODE “80H” and corresponding ACTION “55H”. The command name “waiting customer demo (with alert)” includes MODE “80H” and the corresponding ACTION “AAH”. The command name “blackout recovery (without alert)” includes MODE “ABH” and corresponding ACTION “55H”. The command name “power failure recovery (with alert)” includes MODE “ABH” and corresponding ACTION “AAH”. The effect control device 300 does not perform alert notification when receiving a power failure recovery time command including the command name “customer waiting demo (without alerting)” or the command name “power failure recovery (without alerting)”. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when receiving a power failure recovery time command including the command name “customer waiting demo (with alert)” or the command name “power failure recovery (with alert)”.

Next, the alerting performed during the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change system command according to the fifth embodiment.
The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special view game process (see FIG. 22) and transmits the effect command to the effect control device 300.

  The variation command (variation type command) indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the start of variation of the special figure game. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command of the transmission order "1" (command name "design decoration"). The command name “decorative design designation” includes one of MODE “85H” and ACTION “11H” to ACTION “7FH” according to the decorative design. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “2-1” or the transmission order “2-2” as the transmission order “2” command. For example, the gaming control apparatus 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order "2-1" when the warning (flag) is reset, and when the warning (flag) is set, the transmission order " The command corresponding to 2-2 "can be transmitted. The command name “variation pattern designation (without alerting)” includes one of MODE “COH” to MODE “D2H” and one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each variation pattern. The command name “variation pattern designation (with alert)” includes one of MODE “D3H” to MODE “D7H” and one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each variation pattern. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “3” (command name “special figure 1 hold count”). The command name “special figure 1 pending count” includes one of MODE “A1H” and ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no pending to 4 pending numbers. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “4” (command name “special figure 2 hold count”). The command name “special figure 2 pending count” includes one of MODE “A2H” and ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no pending to 4 pending numbers. The effect control device 300 does not perform alert notification when it receives a variation command including the command name “variation pattern designation (without alerting)”. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when it receives a variation command including the command name “specify variation pattern (with alert)”.

Next, the alerting performed during the prefetch change display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example of the prefetch change system command according to the fifth embodiment.
The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special view game process (see FIG. 22) and transmits the effect command to the effect control device 300.

  The look-ahead fluctuation command (pre-reading fluctuation system command) indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the start of the prefetch fluctuation of the special-figure game. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order "1" (command name "prefetch symbol designation"). The command name “pre-reading decoration symbol designation” includes one of MODE “FDH” and ACTION “11H” to ACTION “7FH” according to the pre-reading decoration symbol. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “2-1” or the transmission order “2-2” as the transmission order “2” command. For example, the gaming control apparatus 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order "2-1" when the warning (flag) is reset, and when the warning (flag) is set, the transmission order " The command corresponding to 2-2 "can be transmitted. The command name “specifying prefetch pattern specification (without alerting)” includes one of MODE “EOH” to MODE “F2H” and one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each prefetch fluctuation pattern. The command name “specifying prefetch pattern specification (with alert)” includes one of MODE “F3H” to MODE “F7H” and one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each prefetch variation pattern. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “3” (command name “special figure 1 hold count”). The command name “special figure 1 pending count” includes one of MODE “A1H” and ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no pending to 4 pending numbers. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command of the transmission order “4” (command name “special figure 2 hold count”). The command name “special figure 2 pending count” includes one of MODE “A2H” and ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no pending to 4 pending numbers. The effect control device 300 does not perform alert notification when it receives a fluctuation command including the command name “pre-reading fluctuation pattern designation (without alerting)”. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when it receives a fluctuation command including the command name “pre-reading fluctuation pattern designation (with alert)”.

Next, the alerting performed according to the progress of the special drawing game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure game system command of the fifth embodiment.
The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special view game process (see FIG. 22) and transmits the effect command to the effect control device 300.

  The special figure game command indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the time of state transition of the special figure game. The special drawing game command includes a customer waiting demo command transmitted when the state of the special drawing game transitions to the customer waiting demo, a fanfare command transmitted when the special drawing game state transitions to the fanfare, and the special drawing game A special winning opening open nth command to be sent when the state of is transitioning to the special winning opening opening nth, an interval command to be sent when the special drawing game state transitions to an interval, and a special drawing game state is ending And an ending command to be sent when transitioning to

  The customer waiting demo command has a command name "customer waiting demo (without alerting)" and a command name "user waiting demo (with alerting)". The command name “waiting customer demo (without alerting)” includes MODE “80H” and ACTION “01H”. The command name “waiting customer demo (with alert)” includes MODE “80H” and one of ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” according to the alerting mode. The effect control device 300 does not perform alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name “customer waiting demo (without alerting)”. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name “customer waiting demo (with alert)”.

  The fanfare command has a command name "fanfare (without alerting)" and a command name "fanfare (with alerting)". The command name “fanfare (without alert)” includes MODE “81H” and ACTION “01H”. The command name “fanfare (with alert)” includes one of MODE “81H” and ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” according to the alert mode. The effect control device 300 does not perform the alert notification when the special drawing game command including the command name “fanfare (without alerting)” is received. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name "fanfare (with alert)".

  The large winning opening opening n-th command has a command name "large winning opening opening n-th (without alerting)" and a command name "big winning opening opening n-th (with alerting)". The command name "big winning opening open n-th (without alerting)" includes one of ACTION "01H" to ACTION "10H" depending on the MODE "82H" and the number of times of opening the big winning opening (round number). The command name "big winning opening open n-th (with alerting)" includes one of ACTION "11H" to ACTION "20H" according to the MODE "82H" and the number of times of opening the big winning opening (round number). The effect control device 300 does not perform alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name “n winning game opening opening n-th (without alerting)”. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name “n-th winning opening opening open (with alert)”.

  The interval command has a command name "interval (without alerting)" and a command name "interval (with alerting)". The command name "interval (without alert)" includes MODE "83H" and ACTION "01H". The command name “interval (with alert)” includes one of MODE “83H” and ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” according to the alert mode. The effect control device 300 does not perform alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name “interval (without alerting)”. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name “interval (with alert)”.

  The ending command has a command name “ending (without alerting)” and a command name “ending (with alerting)”. The command name “ending (without alerting)” includes MODE “84H” and ACTION “01H”. The command name “ending (with alerting)” includes MODE “84H” and any of ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” according to the alerting mode. The effect control device 300 does not perform alert notification when it receives a special figure game command including the command name “ending (without alerting)”. The effect control device 300 performs alert notification when it receives a special drawing game command including the command name “interval (with alert)”.

  In this manner, the game control device 100 can decide whether to execute the alerting and use the command transmitted to the effect control device 300 to instruct the effect control device 300 to execute the alerting. Further, the game control device 100 can specify the alerting mode and instruct the effect control device 300 to execute the alerting.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a game control unit (game control device 100) that controls the progress of the game in an integrated manner, and a rendering device (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19 b) and an effect control unit (effect control apparatus 300). The game control unit determines whether or not to execute the alerting regarding the entanglement of the game, and instructs the effect control unit to transmit the effect of the game (sends an effect command), including the performance of the alerting execution. The effect control unit, upon receiving an instruction including whether to execute the alerting from the game control unit, performs alerting with the effect device.

(2) The game control unit of (1) specifies the warning mode and instructs the effect control unit whether to execute the warning.
Sixth Embodiment
A sixth embodiment will now be described. In the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays a warning display for calling a player's attention about forgetting to remove a card (forgetting removal) across the ending of the first big hit and the variable display performed after the ending. Do. The warning display performed in the first big hit ending is set by the ending setting process, and the warning display performed in the variable display after the ending is set by the effect display editing setting process.

  The card to be alerted is a prepaid card inserted in the card unit. The gaming machine 10 can discharge the prepaid card from the card unit by accepting the player's return operation.

[Ending setting process]
First, ending setting processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The ending setting process is a process of setting a warning display at the first big hit ending. The ending setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The ending setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D80 (see FIG. 112) of the special figure game command process.

  [Step D161] The control unit determines whether or not the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot. The first jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the first jackpot of a series of consecutive jackpots, for example, a jackpot except for a jackpot in probability fluctuation (high probability) or a jackpot in public support. The control unit determines, for example, whether or not the jackpot under execution is the first jackpot based on the command reception history. If the control unit determines that the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot, it proceeds to step D162, and if it determines that the jackpot is not the first jackpot, it proceeds to step D164.

  [Step D162] The control unit sets an alerting ending as the big hit ending. That is, the control unit sets a warning end when the running big hit is the first big hit. The alerting ending is an ending with an alert display. The alert display will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D163] The control unit sets a warning timer, and ends the ending setting process. The reminder timer is a timer related to the display time of the reminder display. The control unit continues the alert display until the variable display after the end of the big hit ends, but specifies the end timing of the alert display by the alert timer. For example, the control unit sets 15 seconds (15000 ms) in the alert timer.

  [Step D164] The control unit sets an attention-free end as the big hit ending, and ends the ending setting process. That is, the control unit sets a no-attention end if the running big hit is not the first big hit. A no-attention end is an ending that does not involve an attention display.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set the alerting ending as the initial big hit ending and can set the no alert ending as the big hit ending other than the first.

[Effect display edit setting processing]
Next, the effect display editing setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect display edit setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The effect display editing setting process is a process of setting a warning display on the variable display after the ending of the first big hit. The effect display editing setting process is a process performed by the control unit within the effect display editing process of step D23 (see FIG. 109) of the main process.

  [Step D171] The control unit determines whether the value of the caution timer is “0”, that is, whether the caution timer has timed out. If the control unit determines that the value of the alerting timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step D172. If the value of the alerting timer is not “0”, the control unit proceeds to step D173.

  [Step D172] The control unit sets a no-attention display effect. Note that the control unit can generate an alert-free display effect based on the variable display command received from the game control device 100.

  [Step D173] The control unit sets an alerting display effect. Note that the control unit can superimpose the alerting display on the alerting-free display effect determined based on the variable display command received from the game control device 100 to generate a alerting display effect.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alert display during the variable display until the alert timer expires.
Next, when the first variation display after the first big hit ends after the attention timer times out, and the display status when the attention timer times up after the first variation display after the first big hit ends The transition of will be described using FIG. 150 and FIG. First, the case where the first variation display after the first jackpot ends after the attention timer has timed out will be described using FIG. FIG. 150 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of the sixth embodiment. The timing chart shown in FIG. 150 shows the transition of the display state when the timing (timing T13) at which the value of the alerting timer becomes "0" is the first variation display after the first big hit. In addition, the said first jackpot shall be derived | led-out by the N-1st fluctuation display.

  After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T10), the gaming machine 10 sets an alert timer and starts ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T10 to timing T11.

  The rush game mode display is a display for notifying the player of a game mode that rushes after a big hit. The rush game mode display may be a still image or a moving image including a pictogram, or may fade in or out in time. In addition, the rush game mode display may be performed together with a sound or a warning sound.

  After the rush game mode display (timing T11), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T11 to timing T12 (ending is completed). The alert A display is a display for alerting about forgetting to take a prepaid card. A reminder A alert warns about forgetting to take a prepaid card in the ending. The attention A display may be a still image or a moving image including a pictogram, or may be faded in or out in time. Further, the alert A display may be performed together with a voice and a warning sound.

  After the alert A display (timing T12), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T12. At this timing, since the value of the reminder timer is not yet "0", the gaming machine 10 displays the N-th variation display in the alert B display.

  The alerting B display is a display for alerting about forgetting to take a prepaid card. The alerting B display displays a fluctuating display while alerting the user about a forgotten prepaid card. The alerting B display may be a still image or a moving image including a pictogram, or may be faded in or out in time. Further, the alerting B display may be performed together with a voice or a warning sound.

  Then, at timing T13 during which the N-th variation display is in progress, the warning timer becomes “0”. The gaming machine 10 ends the N-th variation display at timing T14 and starts the (N + 1) -th variation display. Since the value of the warning timer is “0” at the timing T13, the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th variation display in the normal variation display. The normal change display is a display without warning determined based on the change display command.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by performing the alerting over the period from the ending to the end of the first variable display after the ending of the ending. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the warning display and the variable display by the warning display B after the start of the variable display, it can call the warning without interrupting the ongoing game.
Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 151 where the warning timer is timed out after ending the first variation display after the first big hit. FIG. 151 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of the sixth embodiment; The timing chart of FIG. 151 shows transition of the display state in the case where the timing (timing T25) when the value of the caution timer becomes “0” is in the third variation display after the end of the first big hit. In addition, the said first jackpot shall be derived | led-out by the N-1st fluctuation display.

  After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T20), the gaming machine 10 sets an alerting timer to start ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T20 to timing T21.

After the rush game mode display (timing T21), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T21 to timing T22 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T22), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T22. At this timing, since the value of the reminder timer is not yet "0", the gaming machine 10 displays the N-th variation display in the alert B display.

  The gaming machine 10 ends the N-th variation display at timing T23 and starts the (N + 1) -th variation display. Also at this timing, the value of the reminder timer is not “0”, so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th variation display as the reminder B display.

  The gaming machine 10 ends the (N + 1) th variation display at timing T24 and starts the (N + 2) th variation display. Even at this timing, the value of the reminder timer is not “0”, so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 2) th variation display as the reminder B display.

  Then, at timing T25 during which the N + 2'th variation display is being performed, the value of the caution timer becomes “0”. The gaming machine 10 ends the (N + 2) th variation display at timing T26 and starts the (N + 3) th variation display. Since the value of the warning timer is “0” at timing T25, the gaming machine 10 displays the N + 3rd variation display in the normal variation display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by performing the alerting over the period from the ending to the end of the plurality of variable displays after the ending of the ending. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the warning display and the variable display by the warning display B after the start of the variable display, it can call the warning without interrupting the ongoing game.
Next, the display screen during the rush game mode display, the alert A display, and the alert B display will be described using FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen while the rush game mode display, the alert A display, and the alert B display according to the sixth embodiment.

  A display screen 800 shown in FIG. 152 (1) is a display screen during ending in the display device 41, and is an example of a display screen for guiding a game mode (a rush game mode) after the end of the big hit. The display screen 800 shows that the definite variation explicit mode is entered after the ending. Display screen 800 includes an entering mode name and an indication "entry" that clearly indicates entry into the mode. Note that the mode name “probability change explicit mode” is an example of a rush game mode, and is a mode name that clearly indicates playability such as a general power support mode or a mode name that does not explicitly specify playability such as a chance mode. Good. In addition, the display "entry" is an example of a display that clearly indicates entry into a mode, and may be display "start" or display "first time".

  A display screen 800 a shown in FIG. 152 (2) is an example of a display screen on the display device 41 during the alert A display. Display screen 800 a includes a reminder display 801. The alert display 801 is a display for alerting about a game. The alert display 801 includes an image (pictogram) for calling attention on forgotten or theft of the prepaid card, and a sentence (message) for calling attention on the forgotten or theft of the prepaid card.

  A display screen 800 b shown in FIG. 152 (3) is an example of a display screen on the display device 41 in the alert B display. The display screen 800b includes a warning display 801, a special figure 1 hold count display 802, a special view 2 hold count display 803, and a small symbol group 804.

  The special figure 1 reservation number display 802 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 803 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The special figure 1 reserve number display 802 and the special figure 2 reserve number display 803 are displayed at positions which do not enter the blind spot of the player even by the operation of the board effect device 44 or the game balls rolling on the front side. , Clearly indicate the number of pending storages to the player.

  The small symbol group 804 reports a variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. The small symbol group 804 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 804 of the display screen 800b indicate that they are changing, and indicate that the corresponding special view change display game is in the change display state.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 performs the gaming progress (variation display) and the alerting by performing the alerting on the alerting display 801 while displaying the variable display state by the small symbol group 804 in the alerting B display. Can be compatible.

  In addition, although it was explained using forgetting of the prepaid card as alerting, if it is alerting about a game, it may not be limited to this, for example, it may be alerting such as excessive play prevention of a game.

Modification 1 of Sixth Embodiment
Next, a first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, when the warning timer is timed up while the variable display is displayed by the warning B display, the display in the warning B display is ended even during the variable display, Start the display in the normal variable display.

  The transition of the display state in the case where the display on the alert B display is ended in the middle of the variable display after the alert timer has timed up during the variable display will be described using FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. The timing chart shown in FIG. 153 is displayed when the timing at which the attention timer times out (for example, the value of the attention timer becomes “0”) (timing T33) is the first variation display after the end of the first big hit. Indicates the transition of the state. In addition, the said first jackpot shall be derived | led-out by the N-1st fluctuation display.

  After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T30), the gaming machine 10 sets an alerting timer to start ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T30 to timing T31.

After the rush game mode display (timing T31), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T31 to timing T32 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T32), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T32. At this timing, since the value of the reminder timer is not yet "0", the gaming machine 10 displays the N-th variation display in the alert B display.

  Then, when the value of the reminder timer becomes “0” at the timing T33 during the Nth variation display, the gaming machine 10 stops displaying the Nth variation display in the alert B display, and the Nth The variable display of is displayed in the normal variable display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting display for a desired length of time because the time for performing alerting display does not change according to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (variation display time). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress excessive alerting.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 can ensure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by alerting from the end to the start of the variable display after the ending of the ending. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 performs the alerting and the fluctuating display by the alerting B display after the start of the fluctuating display, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alerting without interrupting the ongoing game.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs alerting by superimposing the alert B display on the normal fluctuation display, clears the alert B display after the expiration of the alert timer, and continues normal fluctuation display. The image processing burden by the device 300 can be reduced.

[Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification 2 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the variable display is displayed together with the alerting in the variable display of the predefined number of times after the ending of the first jackpot. For example, the gaming machine 10 can realize the alert display in the variable display of the specified number of times by using the alert counter instead of the alert timer. The alerting counter is a counter related to the number of times of displaying a fluctuation display together with alerting.

  About the transition of the display state when displaying the fluctuation display together with the alerting in the case of displaying the fluctuation display together with the alerting in the one fluctuation display after the ending of the first big hit and in the two fluctuation displays after the ending of the first jackpot This will be described using FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment.

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 154 (1), the transition of the display state in the case of displaying an alert when displaying one fluctuation display after the first big hit (set the alert counter to “1”) Show. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 154 (2), the transition of the display state in the case of performing the alerting (setting "2" in the alerting counter) when displaying the two variable displays after the first big hit Show. In addition, the said first jackpot shall be derived | led-out by the N-1st fluctuation display.

  First, FIG. 154 (1) will be described, in which a warning is displayed at the time of displaying one change display after the first big hit. After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T40), the gaming machine 10 sets an alerting counter to start ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T40 to timing T41.

After the rush game mode display (timing T41), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T41 to timing T42 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T42), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T42. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “1” (the variable display ends 0 times), so the gaming machine 10 displays the Nth variable display in the alert B display.

  When ending the Nth variable display at timing T43, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the alerting counter ("-1") and starts the N + 1th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “0” (the variation display ends once), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) -th variation display in the normal variation display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by performing the alerting over the period from the ending to the end of the first variable display after the ending of the ending. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the warning display and the variable display by the warning display B after the start of the variable display, it can call the warning without interrupting the ongoing game.
Next, FIG. 154 (2) will be described, in which a warning is displayed at the time of displaying the two variable displays after the first big hit. After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T40), the gaming machine 10 sets an alerting counter to start ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T40 to timing T41.

After the rush game mode display (timing T41), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T41 to timing T42 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T42), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T42. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “2” (the variable display ends 0 times), so the gaming machine 10 displays the Nth variable display in the alert B display.

  When ending the Nth variable display at timing T43, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the alerting counter ("-1") and starts the N + 1th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “1” (the variable display ends once), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th variable display as the alert B display.

  When ending the (N + 1) th variable display at timing T44, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the warning counter ("-1") and starts the (N + 2) th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “0” (the variation display ends twice), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 2) th variation display in the normal variation display.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 performs alerting over the end during the big hit and the variation display after the big hit until the second variation display after the end of the ending is finished. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of sufficient alerting time. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the warning display and the variable display by the warning display B after the start of the variable display, it can call the warning without interrupting the ongoing game.

[Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the third modification of the sixth embodiment, the warning is not performed in the ending of the first jackpot, and the warning is performed in the variable display after the ending of the ending.

  The transition of the display state in the case where attention is not given in the ending of the first big hit but attention is given in the variable display after the ending of the ending will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of the modification 3 of the sixth embodiment.

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 155 (1), the transition of the display state in the case of displaying an alert when displaying one fluctuation display after the first big hit (set the alert counter to “1”) Show. The timing chart shown in FIG. 155 (2) indicates the transition of the display state in the case of performing the alerting (when setting the alerting counter “2”) when displaying the two variable displays after the first big hit. Show. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 155 (3), the timing (timing T53) at which the attention timer times up (for example, the value of the attention timer becomes “0”) is in the second variation display after the first big hit ends. Indicates the transition of the display state of the case. In addition, the said first jackpot shall be derived | led-out by the N-1st fluctuation display.

  First, FIG. 155 (1) will be described, in which a warning is displayed at the same time when displaying one change display after the first big hit. After completing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T50), the gaming machine 10 sets an alerting counter and starts ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T50 to timing T51 (ending is ended). .

  After the rush game mode display (timing T51), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T51. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “1” (the variable display ends 0 times), so the gaming machine 10 displays the Nth variable display in the alert B display.

  When ending the Nth variable display at timing T52, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the alerting counter ("-1") and starts the N + 1th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “0” (the variation display ends once), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) -th variation display in the normal variation display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by performing the alerting after the ending until the end of the first variable display after the ending. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the warning display and the variable display by the warning display B after the start of the variable display, it can call the warning without interrupting the ongoing game.
Next, FIG. 155 (2) will be described, in which a warning is displayed at the same time when displaying two variation displays after the first big hit. After completing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T50), the gaming machine 10 sets an alerting counter and starts ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T50 to timing T51 (ending is ended). .

  After the rush game mode display (timing T51), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T51. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “2” (the variable display ends 0 times), so the gaming machine 10 displays the Nth variable display in the alert B display.

  When ending the Nth variable display at timing T52, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the alerting counter ("-1") and starts the N + 1th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “1” (the variable display ends once), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th variable display in the alert B display.

  When ending the (N + 1) th variable display at timing T54, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the warning counter ("-1") and starts the (N + 2) th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “0” (the variation display ends twice), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 2) th variation display in the normal variation display.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by performing the alerting after ending the ending until the second variable display after ending the ending is ended. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the warning display and the variable display by the warning display B after the start of the variable display, it can call the warning without interrupting the ongoing game.
Although the gaming machine 10 performs alerting after the ending of the ending until the second variation display after the ending ends, the alerting may be performed until the third or subsequent variation display ends. Good. For example, the gaming machine 10 may issue a warning during the period from ending the ending to ending the storage at the end of the big hit (for example, eight times of variable display). Further, the gaming machine 10 may call attention during a probability change (for example, eight times of variable display) after the end of the ending and the end of the big hit. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may call attention during the normal power support after the end of the ending and after the end of the big hit (for example, the variable display of 70 times).

  Next, FIG. 155 (3) will be described, in which the timing at which the caution timer is timed up is in the second variation display after the end of the first big hit. After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T50), the gaming machine 10 sets an alert timer and starts ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T50 to timing T51 (ending is ended). .

  After the rush game mode display (timing T51), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T51. At this timing, since the value of the reminder timer is not yet "0", the gaming machine 10 displays the N-th variation display in the alert B display.

  The gaming machine 10 ends the N-th variation display at timing T52 and starts the (N + 1) -th variation display. At this timing, the value of the reminder timer is not yet “0”, so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th variation display as the reminder B display.

  When the value of the reminder timer becomes "0" at timing T53 during the N + 1 variable display, the gaming machine 10 stops displaying the N + 1 variable display as the alert B display, and the N + 1 variable Display the display in the normal variable display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by alerting after the ending of the ending until the reminder timer is timed up. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the warning display and the variable display by the warning display B after the start of the variable display, it can call the warning without interrupting the ongoing game.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs alerting by superimposing the alert B display on the normal fluctuation display, clears the alert B display after the expiration of the alert timer, and continues normal fluctuation display. The image processing burden by the device 300 can be reduced.

[Modification 4 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the alerting timer, the alerting end trigger is used in combination to determine the end of the fluctuation display accompanied by alerting. The gaming machine 10 performs the warning timer count process to determine the end of the variable display accompanied by the warning using the warning end trigger.

[Attention timer count processing]
The attention timer count processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a flowchart of reminder timer count processing of the modified example 4 of the sixth embodiment. The attention calling timer count processing is processing for counting the attention calling timer set in the ending setting processing (see FIG. 148). The warning timer count process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300.

For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop of step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.
[Step D181] The control unit determines whether the gaming machine 10 has detected card removal. The control unit can detect card removal based on a command received from the game control device 100.

If the control unit determines that the card removal has been detected, the process proceeds to step D186, and if the control unit determines that the card removal is not detected, the process proceeds to step D182.
[Step D182] The control unit determines whether the gaming machine 10 has detected a confirmation response from the player. When the control unit detects that the selection button switch 25a or the determination button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 is pressed, it can determine that the confirmation response has been detected.

If the control unit determines that the confirmation response has been detected, the process proceeds to step D186. If the control unit determines that the confirmation response is not detected, the process proceeds to step D183.
[Step D183] The control unit determines whether a big hit has occurred. The control unit can determine whether or not the jackpot has been derived as the game result in the variable display based on the variable display command received from the game control device 100.

If the control unit determines that a big hit has occurred, it proceeds to step D186, and if it determines that a big hit has not occurred, it proceeds to step D184.
The control unit may determine whether or not a big hit occurs, instead of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred. The control unit can determine, based on the variable display command received from the game control device 100, whether or not the game result in the variable display will lead to a big hit.

  [Step D184] The control unit determines whether it is time to update (count down) the value of the alerting timer. If the control unit determines that it is the timing to update the value of the alerting timer, it proceeds to step D185, and if it determines that it is not the timing to update the value of the alerting timer, it returns to step D181.

[Step D185] The control unit counts down the value of the alerting timer ("-1"), and proceeds to Step D187.
[Step D186] The control unit sets the value of the caution timer to "0".

  [Step D187] The control unit determines whether the value of the alerting timer is “0”. If the control unit determines that the value of the attention timer is “0”, it ends the attention timer count processing, and if it determines that the value of the attention timer is not “0”, it returns to step D181.

  In this manner, when a predetermined event (for example, card removal detection) occurs, the gaming machine 10 determines that the warning timer has timed out by advancing the value of the warning timer to “0”. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can end the alerting even before the time set in the alerting timer has elapsed. In addition to the card removal, the gaming machine 10 can use the confirmation response or the occurrence of a big hit as an alert end trigger.

  According to this, when the gaming machine 10 does not need to be alerted (when the card is withdrawn, when the player confirms, when the big hit occurs or when the big hit occurs), the game is immediately alerted. Because it is possible to finish, it is possible to suppress excessive alerting. In addition, said alerting completion | finish trigger is an example, It does not restrict to this.

[Modification 5 of the sixth embodiment]
A fifth modification of the sixth embodiment will now be described. In the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment, the gaming control device 100 issues a variation display command using the first variation pattern table after the first big hit. The fluctuation display command issued using the first fluctuation pattern table after the first jackpot is a fluctuation display command instructing to display the first fluctuation display after the first jackpot along with the alerting.

  The first jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the first jackpot of a series of consecutive jackpots, and is, for example, a jackpot excluding a jackpot in probability fluctuation (high probability) or a jackpot in public support. In other words, the first big hit is a normal gaming state (low probability state) and a specific gaming state (general drawing high probability state, special drawing high probability state, general power support state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is a hit that is derived in the normal gaming state. As the first jackpot, for example, there is a jackpot (a jackpot before becoming a specific gaming state) that is a trigger for starting a general drawing high probability state, a special drawing high probability state, or a general power support state.

[First hit after the first hit variation pattern table]
First, the first change pattern table after the first hit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of a first change pattern table after the first hit of the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment; The first variation and first variation pattern table is a table used when the gaming control device 100 determines the first variation pattern after the first variation and the first variation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines a specific effect mode within the framework of the fluctuation pattern determined by the game control apparatus 100 (for example, fluctuation time) and displays fluctuation display.

  The first variation and first variation pattern table includes an item “variation result”, an item “variation pattern”, and an item “variation time”. The item "variation result" indicates the variation result ("big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 3", "missing") derived as a result of the variable display. For example, "big hit 1" is a 16 round big hit with probability variation, "big hit 2" is a 4 round big hit with probability variation, and "big hit 3" is a 4 round big hit without probability variation .

  The item "variation pattern" indicates a variation pattern according to the variation result. For example, the item “variation pattern” includes a plurality of types of variation patterns (“attention B1”, “attention B2”, “attention B3”, “attention B4”) that display the alert B in different modes. . Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can display the alerting B in a different mode in accordance with the variation result.

  The item "variation time" indicates the variation time of each variation pattern. The item "variation time" has the same variation time of each variation pattern (for example, 4 seconds). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 secures a reminder B display time for a predetermined time regardless of the variation result.

  According to the first variation pattern table after the first big hit, when the variation result is “big hit 1”, the game control device 100 transmits a variation pattern “alert call B1” having a variation time of 4 seconds to the effect control device 300 Do. Similarly, when the variation result is "big hit 2", the game control device 100 transmits a variation pattern "alert call B2" having a variation time of 4 seconds to the effect control device 300, and the variation result is "big hit 3". When the variation pattern “alert call B3” having a variation time of 4 seconds is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the variation result is “off”, the variation pattern “alert call B4 having a variation time of 4 seconds Is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  As described above, by making the first fluctuation period common to all four seconds after the first big hit regardless of the fluctuation result, the gaming machine 10 displays the fluctuation display together with the alerting for 4 seconds regardless of the fluctuation result. Can be secured.

  Further, since the gaming machine 10 selects the alert display pattern according to the variation result, it can alert in the display mode according to the variation result. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest in the alert display mode, and a high alerting effect can be expected.

  Next, the transition of the display state when the fluctuation result of the first fluctuation display after the first big hit is "off", and the display condition when the fluctuation result of the first fluctuation display after the first big hit is "big hit" The transition will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. First, the case where the fluctuation result of the fluctuation display of the first time after the first big hit is “off” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a timing chart of transition of a display state after the end of the ending of the first big hit of the modification 5 of the sixth embodiment; The timing chart shown in FIG. 158 shows the transition of the display state in the case where the fluctuation result of the first fluctuation display after the first jackpot is “off”. In addition, the said first jackpot shall be derived | led-out by the N-1st fluctuation display.

  After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T60), the gaming machine 10 starts ending and performs rush game mode display from timing T60 to timing T61.

After the rush game mode display (timing T61), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T61 to timing T62 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T62), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending. Since the Nth change display is the first change display after the big hit, the game control device 100 determines the change pattern using the first change target after the first big change. Since the Nth change display derives “off”, the game control apparatus 100 selects “alert alert B4” as the change pattern and transmits it to the effect control apparatus 300. The gaming machine 10 displays the N-th variation display from the timing T62 in the alert B4 display in accordance with the variation pattern “alert alert B4”. The alert call B4 display will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The gaming machine 10 ends the Nth change display at a timing T63 after a lapse of 4 seconds (4s) from the timing T62, and starts the (N + 1) th change display. In addition, the game control apparatus 100 issues the fluctuation display command after the (N + 1) th time using the normal fluctuation pattern table. As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th variable display from the timing T63 in a normal variable display not accompanied by a warning display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays a warning display for alerting the player of forgetting to remove the card (forgetting to take it) across the ending of the first jackpot and the variable display performed after the ending. Further, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by alerting until the first variable display after the ending of the ending is ended.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 allocates one second to the warning A in the ending period of five seconds, and allocates four seconds to the first change time after the big hit to the warning B4, thereby securing the five seconds of the warning time. it can. In order to secure a warning time of 7 seconds, the gaming machine 10 may set the fluctuation time set in the first fluctuation pattern table after the first jackpot to 6 seconds.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the variable display together with the alerting in a mode according to the fluctuation result after the start of the variable display, the gaming machine 10 can call attention without interrupting the ongoing game.

  The gaming machine 10 may use the variation pattern table after the first big hit not only the first big after the first big hit but also a predetermined number of times, for example, twice. According to this, the game machine 10 can perform the alerting B4 display for at least two times of the variable display in the case of "due" in the first variable display after the first big hit, the first change after the first big hit A warning time can be secured without lengthening the fluctuation time set in the pattern table.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can proceed with the game promptly including the variable display after the big hit, and can secure a sufficient alerting time.
Next, the case where the fluctuation result of the first variable display after the first big hit is the big hit will be described using FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a timing chart of transition of a display state after the end of the ending of the first jackpot according to the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment; The timing chart shown in FIG. 159 shows the transition of the display state in the case where the fluctuation result of the first fluctuation display after the first jackpot is “big hit 1”. In addition, the said first jackpot shall be derived | led-out by the N-1st fluctuation display.

  After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T70), the gaming machine 10 starts ending and performs rush game mode display from timing T70 to timing T71.

After the rush game mode display (timing T71), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T71 to timing T72 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T72), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending. Since the Nth change display is the first change display after the big hit, the game control device 100 determines the change pattern using the first change target after the first big change. Since the Nth change display derives “big hit 1”, the game control apparatus 100 selects “alert alert B1” as the change pattern and transmits it to the effect control apparatus 300. The gaming machine 10 displays the N-th variation display from the timing T72 as a warning B1 display. The alert call B1 display will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a four-second warning B1 display accompanied by a warning from timing T72 to timing T73 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern "warning B1". When the N-th variation display is finished at timing T73, the gaming machine 10 starts the big-hit effect according to "big hit 1" from timing T73 because the N-th variation result is "big hit 1".

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by performing the alerting over the period from the ending to the end of the first variable display after the ending of the ending. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the variable display together with the alerting in a mode according to the fluctuation result after the start of the variable display, the gaming machine 10 can call attention without interrupting the ongoing game.
Next, display screens during alerting B1 display and alerting B4 display will be described using FIG. FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen during alerting B1 display and alerting B4 display according to the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment.

  A display screen 810 shown in FIG. 160 (1) is an example of a display screen on the display device 41 while displaying the alert B1. The display screen 810 includes a warning display 801 a, a special figure 1 hold count display 802, a special view 2 hold count display 803, and a small symbol group 804.

  The alert display 801 a is displayed in a display mode (color, shape) according to the variation result “big hit 1” (reminder B1). The alert display 801 a is displayed in a mode according to the size of the jackpot value. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify of the value of the jackpot value derived as a result of the variable display from the display mode of the alert call B1. The alert display 801a includes an image (pictogram) for alerting attention on forgetting or theft of the prepaid card and notifying a change result, and a sentence (message) alerting attention on forgetting or theft of the prepaid card. For example, the alert display 801 a displays a message of “hit” on the card discharged from the card outlet, thereby improving the alert effect and obtaining interest in the alert display.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a display mode according to the variation result "big hit 1" (notice B1), a display mode according to the variation result "big hit 2" (notice B2), a variation result "big hit 3" (notice The display modes corresponding to the awakening B3) can be different from each other. For example, the gaming machine 10 may set the message displayed on the card in the alert call B1 as "super big hit" and the message displayed on the card in the alert call B2 as "big hit" or the like.

  A display screen 810 a shown in FIG. 160 (2) is an example of a display screen displayed on the display unit 41 while displaying the alert B 4. The display screen 810a includes a warning display 801b, a special figure 1 hold count display 802, a special view 2 hold count display 803, and a small symbol group 804.

  The alert display 801 b is displayed in a display mode (color, shape) according to the variation result “off” (reminder B 4). The alert display 801b includes an image (pictogram) for alerting attention on forgetting or theft of the prepaid card and notifying a change result, and a sentence (message) alerting attention on forgetting or theft of the prepaid card. For example, the alert display 801 b displays a message of “detachment” on the card ejected from the card outlet, thereby improving the alert effect and obtaining interest in the alert display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can notify of the progress of the game (variation result) by alerting by alerting in a mode according to the variation result. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both gaming progress and alerting. Note that the display screens 810 and 810a indicate the game progress state to the player by performing variation display with the small symbol group 804 while displaying the alert displays 801a and 801b. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the player from forgetting to proceed with the game and to obtain an unexpected disadvantage.

  Even when the effect control device 300 superimposes the alert display on the alert non-display effect to generate the alert effect display effect, the gaming machine 10 similarly operates according to the variation result of the variable display. The alert can be displayed with.

[Modification 6 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a sixth modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. According to the sixth modification of the sixth embodiment, when the first variation result after the first big hit is “off”, the second variation pattern table is used to display the second variation display while being alerted. The game control apparatus 100 issues a variable display command instructing the game controller 100 to execute the command. The second variation pattern table is a table used when the game control apparatus 100 determines the second variation display effect display when the first variation result of the first variation is "out". .

[First change pattern table after first hit and second change pattern table]
The first change pattern table after the first big hit and the second change pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of a first change pattern table and a second change pattern table after the first hit of the sixth modification of the sixth embodiment; When determining the first variation pattern after the first jackpot, the gaming control apparatus 100 uses the first variation jackpot shown in FIG. 161 (1). In addition, when the variation control result of the first variation display after the first big hit is “off”, the game control device 100 shows in FIG. 161 (2) when determining the second variation pattern after the first size big hit. The second variation pattern table is used. The gaming machine 10 displays the variation display in a mode according to the variation pattern determined by the gaming control apparatus 100.

  First, the first change pattern table after the first big hit will be described using FIG. 161 (1). The first variation and first variation pattern table includes an item “variation result”, an item “variation pattern”, and an item “variation time”. The item "variation result" indicates the variation result ("big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 3", "missing") derived as a result of the variable display. For example, "big hit 1" is a 16 round big hit with probability variation, "big hit 2" is a 4 round big hit with probability variation, and "big hit 3" is a 4 round big hit without probability variation .

  The item "variation pattern" indicates a variation pattern according to the variation result. For example, the item “variation pattern” includes a plurality of types of variation patterns (“attention B1”, “attention B2”, “attention B3”, “attention B4”) that display the alert B in different modes. . Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can display the alerting B in a different mode in accordance with the variation result.

  The item "variation time" indicates the variation time of each variation pattern. The item "variation time" has the same variation time of each variation pattern (for example, 4 seconds). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 secures a warning B display time of a predetermined time regardless of the variation result in the first variation display after the first jackpot.

  According to the first variation pattern table after the first big hit, when the variation result is “big hit 1”, the game control device 100 transmits a variation pattern “alert call B1” having a variation time of 4 seconds to the effect control device 300 Do. Similarly, when the variation result is "big hit 2", the game control device 100 transmits a variation pattern "alert call B2" having a variation time of 4 seconds to the effect control device 300, and the variation result is "big hit 3". When the variation pattern “alert call B3” having a variation time of 4 seconds is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the variation result is “off”, the variation pattern “alert call B4 having a variation time of 4 seconds Is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  As described above, by making the first fluctuation period common to all four seconds after the first big hit regardless of the fluctuation result, the gaming machine 10 displays the fluctuation display together with the alerting for 4 seconds regardless of the fluctuation result. Can be secured.

  Further, since the gaming machine 10 selects the alert display pattern according to the variation result, it can alert in the display mode according to the variation result. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest in the alert display mode, and a high alerting effect can be expected.

Next, a second variation pattern table will be described using FIG. 161 (2).
The second fluctuation pattern table includes an item of fluctuation result, an item of fluctuation pattern, and an item of fluctuation time. In the item of the variation result, the variation results ("big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 3", "off") that the variable display can take are stored. In the item of the fluctuation pattern, display modes according to the fluctuation result are stored. The item of the fluctuation pattern stores a display mode when the fluctuation display is displayed together with the alerting. In the item of fluctuation time, fluctuation time for displaying a fluctuation display in the case of each fluctuation result is stored.

  The second variation pattern table includes an item "variation result", an item "variation pattern", and an item "variation time". The item "variation result" indicates the variation result ("big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 3", "missing") derived as a result of the variable display.

  The item "variation pattern" indicates a variation pattern according to the variation result. For example, the item “variation pattern” includes a plurality of types of variation patterns (“attention B5”, “attention B6”, “attention B7”, “attention B8”) that display the alert B in different modes. . Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can display the alerting B in a different mode in accordance with the variation result.

  The item "variation time" indicates the variation time of each variation pattern. The item "variation time" makes the variation time of each variation pattern the same (for example, 2 seconds). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 secures a warning B display time of a predetermined time regardless of the variation result in the second variation display after the first big hit.

  According to the second variation pattern table, when the variation result is “big hit 1”, the game control device 100 transmits a variation pattern “alert alert B5” having a variation time of 2 seconds to the effect control device 300. Similarly, when the variation result is "big hit 2", the game control device 100 transmits a variation pattern "alert call B6" having a variation time of 2 seconds to the effect control device 300, and the variation result is "big hit 3". When the variation pattern “alert alert B7” having a variation time of 2 seconds is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the variation result is “off”, the variation pattern “alert alert B8 having a variation time of 2 seconds Is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  As described above, by making the second variation time common to the second after the first big hit regardless of the variation result, the gaming machine 10 displays the variation display together with the alert for 2 seconds regardless of the variation result. Can be secured.

  Further, since the gaming machine 10 selects the alert display pattern according to the variation result, it can alert in the display mode according to the variation result. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest in the alert display mode, and a high alerting effect can be expected.

  According to this, when the first variation display after the first jackpot is not "off", the gaming machine 10 warns for 4 seconds of the first variation time, and the first time is "off". The alert can be performed for six seconds, which is the total of the first and second fluctuation times. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can secure a sufficient alerting time except when deriving a big hit in the first variable display after the first big hit.

[Modification 7 of the sixth embodiment]
A seventh modification of the sixth embodiment will now be described. In the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 determines the number of times to perform the change display accompanied by the alerting according to the hold pre-reading result, using the hold pre-reading result received before the start of the ending. . Moreover, in the modification 7 of 6th Embodiment, the game machine 10 alert | reports a prefetch result by the display mode of alerting.

  The number of times of performing the variable display accompanied by alerting is set by the ending setting process, and the display mode of the alerting performed in the variable display after the ending is set by the effect display editing setting process.

[Ending setting process]
First, the ending setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending setting processing in the effect control device of Modification 7 of the sixth embodiment. The ending setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The ending setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D80 (see FIG. 112) of the special figure game command process.

  [Step D191] The control unit determines whether or not the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot. If the control unit determines that the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot, it proceeds to step D193, and if it determines that it is not the first jackpot, it proceeds to step D192.

  [Step D192] The control unit sets an attention-free end as the big hit ending, and ends the ending setting process. That is, the control unit sets a no-attention end if the running big hit is not the first big hit.

  [Step D193] The control unit sets an alerting ending as the big hit ending. That is, the control unit sets a warning end when the running big hit is the first big hit.

  [Step D194] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the received prefetch result. If the control unit determines that there is a big hit in the received prefetch result, the process proceeds to step D195, and if it is determined that there is no big hit in the received prefetch result, the process proceeds to step D197.

  [Step D195] The control unit specifies the number of “off” pendings until the jackpot is reached based on the received prefetch result. That is, the control unit specifies the number of pending “drops” to be digested before the big hit.

  [Step D196] The control unit sets a value obtained by adding “1” to the hold number of “outside” specified, that is, the number of fluctuations until the big hit, in the alerting counter, and ends the ending setting process.

[Step D197] The control unit specifies the number of pending “off” based on the received pre-read result.
[Step D198] The control unit sets the value of the number of “hold” pendings in the alerting counter, and ends the ending setting process.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set the alerting ending as the initial big hit ending and can set the no alert ending as the big hit ending other than the first.

  In addition, when there is no big hit in the received prefetched result, the gaming machine 10 sets the alerting counter so as to display the fluctuation display with alerting for the number of pending “off”, and the received prefetched result If there is a big hit inside, the alerting counter can be set to display the variable indication with alerting up to the big hit.

[Effect display edit setting processing]
Next, the effect display editing setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect display editing setting processing in the effect control device of Modification 7 of the sixth embodiment. The effect display editing setting process is a process performed by the control unit within the effect display editing process of step D23 (see FIG. 109) of the main process.

  [Step D201] The control unit determines whether the value of the alerting counter is "0". If the control unit determines that the value of the alerting counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step D202, and if the value of the alerting counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D203.

[Step D202] The control unit sets a no-attention display effect.
[Step D203] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the received prefetch result. If the control unit determines that there is a big hit in the received prefetch result, it proceeds to step D205, and if it determines that there is not a big hit in the received prefetch result, it proceeds to step D204.

  [Step D204] The control unit sets a display effect with reminder for release, and ends the effect display edit setting process. For example, the display effect with warning for release is a warning B4 display (see FIG. 160 (2)).

  [Step D205] The control unit determines whether the value of the alerting counter is “1”. That is, the control unit determines whether or not the fluctuation result of the next fluctuation display is a big hit. If the control unit determines that the value of the alerting counter is “1”, it proceeds to step D206, and if it determines that the value of the alerting counter is not “1”, it proceeds to step D207.

  [Step D206] The control unit sets a jackpot alerting display effect, and ends the effect display editing setting process. The jackpot alerting display effect is, for example, the alerting B1 display (see FIG. 160 (1)). In addition, the jackpot attention alerting display effect can be made different display modes according to the type (value) of the jackpot.

  [Step D207] The control unit sets a display effect with notice for jackpot notice, and ends the effect display editing setting process. The jackpot notice alerting display effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alerting display according to the pre-reading result received during the variable display until the value of the alerting counter becomes “0”.
Next, the transition of the display state when there is no big hit in the received prefetch result, and the transition of the display state when there is a big hit in the received prefetch result will be described using FIG. 164 and FIG. First, transition of the display state in the case where there is no big hit in the received pre-fetching result will be described using FIG. FIG. 164 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a timing chart of transition of a display state after the end of the ending of the first big hit of the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment;

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 164 shows the transition of the display state when there is no big hit in the received prefetched result. In addition, the said first jackpot is derived | led-out by the N-1st variable display, and suppose that the number of pending | holding of "out" is "2". In addition, the alerting display effect in the detachment mode is assumed to be alerting B4 display (see FIG. 160 (2)).

  After finishing the final round display of the first big hit (timing T80), the gaming machine 10 sets an alerting counter to start ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T80 to timing T81. Note that the number of pending “off” (“2”) is set in the alerting counter.

After the rush game mode display (timing T81), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T81 to timing T82 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T82), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the N-th variation display from timing T82. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “2” (the variable display ends 0 times), so the gaming machine 10 displays the Nth variable display in the alert B4 display.

  When ending the Nth variable display at timing T83, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the warning counter ("-1"), and starts the N + 1th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “1” (the variable display ends once), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th variable display in the alert B4 display.

  When the game machine 10 finishes the (N + 1) th variable display at timing T84, it decrements the value of the warning counter ("-1") and starts the (N + 2) th variable display. At this timing, since the value of the warning counter is “0” (the variation display ends twice), the gaming machine 10 displays the variation display in the normal variation display.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays a warning display for alerting the player of forgetting to remove the card (forgetting to take it) across the ending of the first jackpot and the variable display performed after the ending. Further, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time, by performing the alerting until the fluctuation display of the number of pending “off” after the ending is ended.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 can also smooth the alerting time by shortening the ending and shortening the alerting A display time as the number of pending “offs” is large. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the excessive alerting by shortening the ending and shortening the alerting A display time according to the number of "losing" being held.

  For example, when the number of pending "offs" is "8", the gaming machine 10 allocates 1 second to the warning A in the ending period of 5 seconds, and the number of pending "offs" is "4". In some cases, the alerting time can be smoothed by allocating 2 seconds to the alerting A within the 5-second ending period.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the variable display together with the alerting in a mode according to the fluctuation result after the start of the variable display, the gaming machine 10 can call attention without interrupting the ongoing game. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest in the alert display mode, and a high alerting effect can be expected.

  Next, transition of the display state when there is a big hit in the received prefetch result will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a timing chart of the display state transition after the ending of the first big hit of the modification 7 of the sixth embodiment.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 165 shows the transition of the display state when there is a big hit in the received prefetch result. In addition, the said first jackpot is derived | led-out by the N-th 1st fluctuation display, and suppose that the number of pending | holding of "out" which is digested before a jackpot is "2". Moreover, the alerting display effect of the big hit mode shall be alerting B1 display (refer FIG. 160 (1)).

  After completing the final round display of the first big hit (after timing T90), the gaming machine 10 sets a warning timer and starts ending, and performs rush game mode display from timing T90 to timing T91. In addition, the value (for example, "3") which added "1" to the pending number (for example, "2") of "out" which is digested before a big hit is set to the attention raising timer.

After the rush game mode display (timing T91), the gaming machine 10 performs alert A display from timing T91 to timing T92 (ending is completed).
After the alert A display (timing T92), the gaming machine 10 ends the ending, and starts the Nth variable display from timing T92. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “3” (the variable display ends 0 times), so the gaming machine 10 displays the Nth variable display with the alert C display.

  The alert C display is a display for alerting about forgetting to take a prepaid card. The alerting C display displays a fluctuating display as well as alerting about a prepaid card forgotten in a manner of giving notice of a big hit (big hit notifying alert). The attention C display may be a still image or a moving image including a pictogram, or may be faded in or out in time. Further, the alert C display may be performed together with a voice or a warning sound.

  When ending the Nth variable display at timing T93, the gaming machine 10 decrements the value of the alerting counter ("-1") and starts the N + 1th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “2” (the fluctuation display ends once), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 1) th fluctuation display as a caution C display.

  When the game machine 10 finishes the (N + 1) th variable display at timing T94, it decrements the value of the warning counter ("-1") and starts the (N + 2) th variable display. At this timing, the value of the alerting counter is “1” (the variable display ends twice), so the gaming machine 10 displays the (N + 2) th variable display in the alert B1 display.

  The gaming machine 10 ends the (N + 2) th variation display at timing T95. Since the N + 2th variation result is a big hit, the gaming machine 10 starts a big hit presentation according to the big hit from the timing T95 when the N + 2'th variation display is finished.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays a warning display for alerting the player of forgetting to remove the card (forgetting to take it) across the ending of the first jackpot and the variable display performed after the ending. Further, the gaming machine 10 can secure a desired alerting time without extending the ending time by performing the alerting until the fluctuation display for the number of reservations until the big hit after the ending is ended.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 can also smooth the alerting time by shortening the ending and shortening the alerting A display time as the number of reservations to the big hit is large. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the excessive alerting by shortening the ending and shortening the alerting A display time according to the number of "losing" being held.

  For example, in the case where the number of reservations until the big hit is "8", the gaming machine 10 allocates 1 second to the warning A in the ending period of 5 seconds, and the number of reservations until the big hit is "4". The alerting time can be smoothed by allocating 2 seconds to the alerting A within the 5-second ending period.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both rapid game progress and securement of a sufficient alert time. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the variable display together with the alerting in a mode according to the fluctuation result after the start of the variable display, the gaming machine 10 can call attention without interrupting the ongoing game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest in the alert display mode by displaying the variable display prior to the big hit (in the alert C display) together with the big hit advance warning, which is high. The alerting effect can be expected.

Next, the display screen in the alert C display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during alert C display of the modified example 7 of the sixth embodiment.
The display screen 820 of the display device 41 is an example of a display screen during the alert C display. The display screen 820 includes a warning display 801 c, a special drawing 1 holding number display 802, a special drawing 2 holding number display 803, and a small symbol group 804.

  The alert display 801 c is displayed in a display mode (color, shape) for anticipating a big hit (according to alert C). The alert display 801c is displayed in a mode according to the value of the big hit to be notified. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify of the value of the jackpot value to be notified from the display mode of the alert C.

  The alert display 801c is an image (pictogram) for alerting about a prepaid card's forgetting or removing the theft and notifying a notice of a big hit, and a sentence (message) for displaying an alert about the forgotten or the stolen prepaid card. Including. For example, the alert display 801c adds a special effect to the card being discharged from the card outlet (for example, an effect of shaking a card, an effect of inserting or removing a card, etc.) and the card is completely taken out. Give a sense of expectation to. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest in the alert display mode, and a high alerting effect can be expected.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can notify of the progress of the game (big hit advance notice) by calling out a warning by giving notice in a mode of giving notice of a big hit. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both gaming progress (variable display) and alerting. In addition, the display screen 820 clearly indicates the game progress state to the player by performing the fluctuation display by the small symbol group 804 while displaying the alert display 801c. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the player from forgetting to proceed with the game and to obtain an unexpected disadvantage.

[Modification 8 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modified example 8 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the eighth modification of the sixth embodiment, a warning is issued across the ending after one of the series of big hits and the variation display after the ending. Further, in the modified example 8 of the sixth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the alerting is performed across the ending and the variable display after the ending using the suspension pre-reading result received before the start of the ending. Decide. In addition, a series of big hit is a group of big hits generally regarded as a continuous big hit, for example, a big hit that occurred in probability fluctuation (high probability) or a big hit that occurred in public support in a continuous group big hit is there.

An alerting display to be made in any one of the endings of the series of jackpots is set by the ending setting process.
[Ending setting process]
The ending setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending setting processing in the effect control device of Modification 8 of the sixth embodiment. The ending setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The ending setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D80 (see FIG. 112) of the special figure game command process.

  [Step D211] The control unit determines whether a warning has been issued during a series of jackpots. The control unit determines, for example, based on the command reception history whether or not a warning has been issued during a series of jackpots. If the control unit determines that the warning has been issued during the series of big hits, it proceeds to step D213, and if it determines that the warnings have not been issued during the series of big hits, it proceeds to step D212.

  [Step D212] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the received prefetch result. If the control unit determines that there is a big hit in the received prefetch result, the process proceeds to step D213, and if it is determined that there is no big hit in the received prefetch result, the process proceeds to step D214.

[Step D213] The control unit sets a no-attention call-out as the big hit ending, and ends the ending setting process.
[Step D214] The control unit sets an alerting end as a big hit ending, and ends the ending setting process.

[Step D215] The control unit sets a warning timer, and ends the ending setting process.
As described above, when there is a big hit in the pre-reading result, the gaming machine 10 sets the no-attention end even if the warning is not made during the series of big hits. That is, the gaming machine 10 indirectly gives notice of the presence or absence of the jackpot in the hold by the presence or absence of the warning at the ending. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of attention to a warning by indirectly giving notice of the presence or absence of the jackpot in the hold based on the presence or absence of the warning in the ending.

[Modification 9 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, another display example of the alert display by the gaming machine 10 of the ninth modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, another display example of the alerting display during change will be described using FIG.

FIG. 168 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displaying a reminder during the variable display of the ninth modification of the sixth embodiment;
The display screen 830 of the display device 41 includes a warning display 801 d, a special drawing 1 holding number display 802, a special drawing 2 holding number display 803, a small symbol group 804, and a large symbol group 805. The large symbol group 805 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest.

  The alert display 801 d is a display for alerting the user about the game. The alert display 801 d is displayed larger than the large symbol group 805 at the center of the screen. The alert display 801 d includes an image (pictogram) for calling attention on forgotten or theft of the prepaid card, and a sentence (message) for calling attention on the forgotten or theft of the prepaid card. Large symbol group 805 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the large symbol group 805 of the display screen 830 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the variation display state.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the alert display 801 d and displays the large symbol group 805 in addition to the small symbol group 804, thereby achieving both the alerting to the player and the interest in the variable display game. it can. Note that the gaming machine 10 displays the alert display 801d at the center of the screen on the display screen 830 and displays the large symbol group 805 smaller at the upper right of the screen, thereby providing more attention to the alert display 801d than the large symbol group 805. It is raising.

  Next, another display example of the alert display in the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a display screen that displays alerting during variable display in the ninth modification of the sixth embodiment;

  The display screen 830a of the display device 41 includes a warning display 801e, a special drawing 1 holding number display 802, a special drawing 2 holding number display 803, a small symbol group 804, a large symbol group 805, and a holding digest display 806. , Hold display 807.

  The alert display 801e is a display for alerting about a game. The alert display 801 e is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 805 at the upper right of the screen. The alert display 801e includes an image (pictogram) for calling attention on forgotten or theft of the prepaid card, and a sentence (message) for calling attention on the forgotten or theft of the prepaid card. The holding and digest display 806 indicates that the special view fluctuation display game is in the fluctuation display state and informs the expectation for the game result by the display mode. The hold display 807 clearly indicates the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game according to the display mode, and reports the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 displays the alert display 801e and displays the large symbol group 805 in addition to the small symbol group 804, thereby achieving both the alerting to the player and the interest in the variable display game. it can. In the display screen 830a, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 805 at the center of the screen and displays the alert display 801e small at the upper right of the screen, thereby providing more attention to the larger symbol group 805 than the alert display 801e. To raise

  Next, another display example of the alerting display in the variable display will be described using FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of a display screen that displays alerting during variable display in the ninth modification of the sixth embodiment;

  The display screen 830 b of the display device 41 is an example of a display screen that displays a reminder during the variable display. Display screen 830b is alert display 801f, special figure 1 reserve number indication 802, special figure 2 reserve number indication 803, small symbol group 804, large symbol group 805, reserve digest indication 806, reserve indication 807 And an independent alerting area display 808.

  The alert display 801 f is a display for alerting the user about the game. The alert display 801 f is displayed in the independent alert area display 808. The alert display 801 f includes an image (pictogram) for calling attention on forgotten or theft of the prepaid card, and a sentence (message) for calling attention on the forgotten or theft of the prepaid card. The independent alerting area display 808 is a display for dividing the alerting display 801 f from another display area, and has, for example, a frame shape.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the alert display 801f and displays the large symbol group 805 in addition to the small symbol group 804, thereby achieving both the alerting to the player and the interest in the variable display game. it can. In the display screen 830b, the gaming machine 10 displays the alert display 801f in the independent alert area display 808 to distinguish the alert display 801f from the other display areas, and pay attention to the alert display 801f. The degree is increased. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the alert display 801f in the independent alerting area display 808 to display the alert display 801f at a position superimposed on another display (for example, the large symbol group 805). This can be done to improve the freedom of layout.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 can generate the display screen 830b by superimposing the alerting display 801f on the independent alerting area display 808 after generating an image related to the variable display game.

  Next, another display example of the alert display during the variable display will be described using FIG. FIG. 171 is a diagram (fourth example) showing an example of a display screen for displaying a reminder during the variable display of the modification 9 of the sixth embodiment.

  The display screen 830 c of the display device 41 includes a special figure 1 reserve number display 802, a special figure 2 reserve number display 803, a small symbol group 804, a large symbol group 805 a, a reserve digest display 806, and a reserve display 807. Including.

  The large symbol group 805a is in charge of the game effect for the purpose of improving the interest, and reports a warning. Large symbol group 805a includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. In the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 805a, a part of a sentence (message) for calling attention on forgetting to take the prepaid card or theft is displayed. Then, the sentences displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are combined to display a sentence (message) that calls attention regarding forgetting or theft of one prepaid card.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both attention to the player and interest in the variable display game by using the symbols of the large symbol group 805a to draw attention to forgetting to take the prepaid card or theft. Note that the gaming machine 10 displays a warning in the large symbol group 805a on the display screen 830b, thereby enhancing the degree of attention to the warning.

  Next, another display example of the alert display in the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a fifth diagram showing an example of a display screen displaying a reminder during the variable display of the ninth modification of the sixth embodiment; The display screens shown in FIGS. 172 (1) to (3) are diagrams showing a flow of a series of effects for displaying a reminder during the variable display.

  A display screen 830d of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 172 (1) has a warning display 801g, a special view 1 hold count display 802, a special view 2 hold count display 803, a small symbol group 804, and a large design group 805. , And a hold digest display 806 and a hold display 807.

  The alert display 801g is a display for alerting the user about a game. The alert display 801 g includes an image (pictogram) for calling attention on forgotten or theft of the prepaid card, and a sentence (message) for calling attention on the forgotten or theft of the prepaid card. The alert display 801 g indicates that the card is being removed from the card outlet.

  The display screen 830e of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 172 (2) has a warning display 801h, a special view 1 hold count display 802, a special view 2 hold count display 803, a small symbol group 804, and a large design group 805. , And a hold digest display 806 and a hold display 807.

  The alert display 801 h is a display for alerting the user about the game. The alert display 801 h includes an image (pictogram) for calling attention on forgotten or theft of the prepaid card, and a sentence (message) for calling attention on the forgotten or theft of the prepaid card. The alert display 801 h displays a state in which the card has been removed from the card outlet. The alert display 801 h displays the stop symbol (“3”) on the card discharged from the card outlet, thereby improving the alert effect and increasing the attention to the alert display.

  In the display screen 830f of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 172 (3), a warning display 801i, a special drawing 1 holding number display 802, a special drawing 2 holding number display 803, a small symbol group 804, and a large symbol group 805 , And a hold digest display 806 and a hold display 807.

  The alert display 801i is a display for alerting about a game. The alert display 801i includes an image (pictogram) for calling attention on forgotten or theft of the prepaid card, and a sentence (message) for calling attention on the forgotten or theft of the prepaid card.

The display screen 830 f displays a state in which the stop symbol (“3”) displayed in the alert display 801 i is reflected in the left symbol of the large symbol group 805.
As described above, the gaming machine 10 performs the effect of displaying the stop symbol using the alerting during the variable display, thereby improving the alerting effect and increasing the attention to the alerting display. Also, as described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the alert display 801 g, 801 h, 801 i, and additionally displays the large symbol group 805 in addition to the small symbol group 804, thereby alerting the player and changing the display. It is compatible with the interest in the game.

[Modification 10 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modified example 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the tenth modification of the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 detects a non-gaming state and performs alerting display when it is in the non-gaming state. The alert display performed in the non-gaming state is set by the alert setting process.

[Caution alert setting process]
The attention setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of alert setting processing according to Modification 10 of the sixth embodiment. The alert setting process is a process of detecting a non-playing state and setting a non-playing state alert (for example, alert A) in the non-playing state. The attention setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300.

For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop of step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.
[Step D221] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is stopped changing. For example, when the control unit receives a customer wait command, the control unit determines that the game machine 10 is in the cessation of fluctuation. The control unit proceeds to step D222 when it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in the variable stop state, and ends the alert setting process when it is determined that the change is not in progress.

  [Step D222] The control unit determines whether touch OFF has been detected by the touch switch signal (touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). The control unit proceeds to step D223 when it is determined that the touch-off is detected, and ends the alert setting process when it is determined that the touch-off is not detected.

[Step D223] The control unit sets a warning for non-gaming state (for example, warning A) and ends the warning setting process.
As described above, when the gaming machine 10 detects the non-gaming state (the change stop and the touch OFF), the player leaves the gaming machine 10 by setting the alert for the non-gaming state. At the time, a warning display for non-playing state can be performed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from forgetting or stealing the prepaid card.

Although the sixth embodiment has been described by using the big hit as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can be applied to all hits including small hits and the like.
The gaming machine 10 of the above-described sixth embodiment (including the modification 1 to the modification 10) has the following features in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 is capable of deriving a hit in relation to the variable display of identification information, and means for calling attention (display device 41, voice output device etc.), control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The alerting means performs alerting about the game. The control unit performs a warning period including a first period (for example, a warning A display period) during the ending of the winning and a second period (for example, a warning B display period) after the start of the variation display after the hitting. Control the execution of alerting by alerting means.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes the display device 41, and the control unit performs alerting display from the display device 41.
(3) The control unit of (2) is a predetermined condition from the start of the first variable display after the hit (display time set in advance, variable display of the number of times defined in advance, acknowledgment by the player, detection of withdrawal, hit, etc.) Is the second period until

  (4) The control unit of (2) is to display the fluctuation display during fluctuation when predetermined conditions (preset display time, confirmation response by the player, withdrawal detection) are satisfied from the start of the first fluctuation display after hitting. The second period is the period until the end.

  (5) The control unit of (2) performs the alerting display (the alerting display 801) in the first period and the alerting display (the alerting display 801a or the like) in the second period in different modes.

(6) The control unit of (2) performs alerting display in a mode (reminder display 801 a, 801 b) according to the fluctuation result of the fluctuation display during display in the second period.
(7) The control unit of (2) sets a second period from the start of the fluctuation display after the hit to the end of the first fluctuation display, and the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display regardless of the fluctuation result Set to a common length (4 seconds).

  (8) The control unit of (2) performs the second period from the start of the first variable display after the hit to the end of the second variable display, or until any of the occurrence of the hit is established. And the first fluctuation time when the fluctuation result of the first fluctuation display is a hit, and the length of twice the second fluctuation time when the fluctuation result of the first fluctuation display is out (4 Is set, and the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display is set to the same length (two seconds) as the second fluctuation time regardless of the fluctuation result of the fluctuation display.

  (9) The control unit in (2) acquires the pending start memory fluctuation result before the second period, and if all the start memory fluctuation results are missed, the control section after the hit A period from the first start of the fluctuation display to the end of fluctuation display of the starting memory for acquiring fluctuation results is a second period.

  (10) The control unit in (9) obtains the pending start memory fluctuation result before the second period, and when the start memory fluctuation result includes a hit, A second period is from the start of the subsequent first variable display until the end of the variable display of the starting memory in which the fluctuation result is hit.

(11) The control unit of (10) performs the alerting display (alert alert display 801c) in a mode of giving a notice of a hit when the fluctuation result in the second period is the display of the change of the removal.
(12) The control unit of (2) displays a warning display at any one of a series of hits.

  (13) When the control unit of (12) does not display a warning display at any of a series of hits and the pending start memory fluctuation result does not include hits. , To display a reminder.

Further, in another aspect, the gaming machine 10 of the above-described sixth embodiment (including the modification 1 to the modification 10) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is capable of deriving a hit in relation to the variable display of identification information, and means for calling attention (display device 41, voice output device etc.), control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The alerting means performs alerting about the game. The control unit is in the normal gaming state among the normal gaming state (low probability state) and the specific gaming state (general drawing high probability state, special drawing high probability state, general power support state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The first period during the ending of the hit derived in (for example, a reminder A display period) and the first fluctuation after the hit derived in the normal gaming condition on the condition that the winning is derived in the normal gaming condition The first variation display pattern is selected on the display, and the alerting means executes the alerting in the alerting period including the second period (for example, the alerting B1 display period) after the start of the variable display of the first variation display pattern. Control.

(2) The control unit of (1) sets a second period until the first variation display ends.
(3) The first-time variation display pattern selected by the control unit in (1) is a common variation time (4 seconds) regardless of the first variation display variation result.

  (4) The control unit of (1) displays the alerting display in the second period according to the variation result of the first fluctuation display (big hit 1, big hit 2, big hit 3, missing). It carries out by alerting B2, alerting B3, and alerting B4).

(5) The control unit of (1) selects the first-time variation display pattern in the predetermined number of variation displays after being hit in the normal gaming state.
Further, in another aspect, the gaming machine 10 of the above-described sixth embodiment (including the modification 1 to the modification 10) has the following features in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 is capable of deriving a hit in relation to the variable display of the identification information, and after the hit, a specific gaming state (general drawing height) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (low probability state) It is possible to generate probability state, special view high probability state, general charge support state etc.), and alerting means (display device 41, voice output device etc.) and control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300) including. The alerting means performs alerting about the game. The control unit selects the first-time variable display pattern in the first change display after the hit derived in the normal gaming state on condition that it is the hit derived in the normal gaming state, and the variation of the first-time variable display pattern Execution of the alerting by the alerting means is controlled in an alerting period including at least a period after the start of display (for example, an alerting B1 display period).

(2) The alerting period of (1) includes the ending period of the hit derived in the normal gaming state (for example, the alerting A display period).
Seventh Embodiment
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 determines whether or not to display a warning display in the first jackpot ending using the pending prefetch result received before the end of the ending of the ending. The warning display performed in the first big hit ending is set by the ending setting process.

[Ending setting process]
The ending setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending setting processing in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. The ending setting process is a process of setting a warning display at the first big hit ending. The ending setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The ending setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D80 (see FIG. 112) of the special figure game command process.

  [Step D231] The control unit determines whether or not the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot. The control unit determines, for example, whether or not the jackpot under execution is the first jackpot based on the command reception history. If the control unit determines that the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot, it proceeds to step D232, and if it determines that the jackpot is not the first jackpot, it proceeds to step D233.

  [Step D232] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the received prefetch result. If the control unit determines that there is a big hit in the received prefetch result, the process proceeds to step D233, and if it is determined that there is no big hit in the received prefetch result, the process proceeds to step D234.

[Step D233] The control unit sets the warning-free end as the big hit ending, and ends the ending setting process.
[Step D234] The control unit sets an alerting ending as the big hit ending.

[Step D235] The control unit specifies the number of pending “off” based on the received pre-reading result.
[Step D236] The control unit sets the value of the number of “hold” pendings in the alerting counter, and ends the ending setting process.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 sets a warning end as a big hit ending when it is the first big hit and there is no big hit in the pre-reading result. In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets a warning-free ending as a big hit ending when it is a first time big hit and there is a big hit in the prefetch result and when it is other than the first big hit.

In the case of alerting, the gaming machine 10 can set the alerting counter so as to alert and display the variable display for the number of pending “off”.
As a result, even in the case of the first jackpot, the gaming machine 10 can set the warning-free ending if there is a jackpot in the prefetching result, and can quickly perform the jackpot in the prefetching result. As described above, when the big hit continues, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the flow of the game from being interrupted by the warning by not putting the warning between the big hits. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to the alerting.

Modification 1 of Seventh Embodiment
Next, a modification 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the second modification of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 performs alerting display at the timing when the big hit in the middle of a series of big hits is interrupted, using the pending prefetch result received before the start of the ending. . The warning display performed at the timing when the big hit is interrupted is set by the ending setting process.

[Ending setting process]
The ending setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending setting processing in the effect control device of Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. The ending setting process is a process of setting a warning display at timing when the big hit is interrupted among the big hit endings. The ending setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The ending setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D80 (see FIG. 112) of the special figure game command process.

  [Step D241] The control unit determines whether or not the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot. The control unit determines, for example, whether or not the jackpot under execution is the first jackpot based on the command reception history. If the control unit determines that the jackpot in progress is the first jackpot, the control unit proceeds to step D242, and if it is determined that the jackpot is not the first jackpot, the control unit proceeds to step D244.

  [Step D242] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the received prefetch result. If the control unit determines that there is a big hit in the received prefetch result, it proceeds to step D243, and if it determines that there is not a big hit in the received prefetch result, it proceeds to step D246.

[Step D243] The control unit determines to postpone alerting, and sets a flag indicating that alerting has been postponed.
[Step D244] The control unit determines whether the reminder has been postponed. The control unit determines that the alerting is deferred, when the flag indicating that the alerting is deferred is set. The control unit proceeds to step D 242 when it is determined that the alerting is postponed, and proceeds to step D 245 when it is determined that the alerting is not forwarded.

[Step D <b> 245] The control unit sets an attention-free end as the big hit ending, and ends the ending setting process.
[Step D246] The control unit sets an alerting end as a big hit ending, and clears a flag indicating that alerting has been postponed.

[Step D247] The control unit specifies the number of pending “off” based on the received pre-reading result.
[Step D248] The control unit sets the value of the number of pending “losings” to the alerting counter, and ends the ending setting process.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 sets the alerting ending at the ending of the timing when the big hit is broken first among the series of big hits. Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the no-attention end as a big-hit ending when the attention is already warned out of the series of big-hits, and when there is a big-hit in the prefetch result.

In the case of alerting, the gaming machine 10 can set the alerting counter so as to alert and display the variable display for the number of pending “off”.
Thereby, even if it is the first big hit, the gaming machine 10 postpones the alerting when there is a big hit in the pre-reading result, immediately performs the big hit in the pre-reading result, and at the timing when the big hit is interrupted It is possible to carry out a delayed reminder.

  As described above, when the big hit continues, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the flow of the game from being interrupted by the warning by not putting the warning between the big hits. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to the alerting. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can alert to a more preferable timing by alerting prior to the timing when the big hit is interrupted.

  In addition, the criterion for determining whether to postpone alerting is not limited to whether or not there is a big hit in the prefetching result. For example, the gaming machine 10 may postpone alerting only when there is a predetermined type of jackpot in the prefetching result. The gaming machine 10, for example, does not forward the game if it is a "4R" big hit.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may determine whether or not to postpone alerting based on the number of prize balls expected to be acquired within the pre-read result. For example, when the number of prize balls expected to be acquired is equal to or less than “100”, the gaming machine 10 does not pre-defer.

Although the seventh embodiment has been described by using the big hit as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can be applied to all hits including small hits and the like.
The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (including the modification 1) described above has the following features in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 is capable of deriving a hit in relation to the variable display of identification information, and means for calling attention (display device 41, voice output device etc.), control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The alerting means performs alerting about the game. When the control unit controls the execution of the alerting by the alerting means in the alerting period including at least the end of the hitting, the controller is careful if there is a starting memory that will lead to a hit starting memory that is pending Cancel the execution of the alerting by the alerting means in the alerting period.

  (2) The control unit of (1) cancels the execution of the alerting by the alerting means in the ending of the subsequent hits of the series when the alerting is performed in the series of hits.

(3) The alerting period of (1) includes the period after the start of the fluctuation display after the hit.
The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program is provided which describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have. The above processing functions are realized on the computer by executing the program on the computer. The program in which the processing content is described can be recorded on a computer readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disc, a magneto-optical recording medium, a semiconductor memory, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk drive (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape and the like. The optical disks include a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

  When the program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM in which the program is recorded is sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in the storage device of the server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing in accordance with the received program.

  In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a programmable logic device (PLD).

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of the present invention and to slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

  In addition, the disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 game machine 41 display apparatus 19a, 19b Speaker 100 game control apparatus 300 presentation control apparatus

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of deriving a win in connection with a variable display of identification information,
Alerting means for alerting about the game;
A control unit that makes it possible to perform the alerting during the ending of the hit and during the variable display of the identification information to be executed after the hit;
Including
The control unit is configured to execute the alerting to be executed during the ending of the hit, when the starting storage held in the hit includes the starting storage to derive the hit. Makes it possible not to carry out both the alerting during the ending of the hit and the alerting during the fluctuation display of the identification information executed after the hitting ,
The alerting includes a first alert on prepaid card forgetting and a second alert on swallowing,
The control unit performs the first alert and the second alert in parallel or sequentially.
Gaming machine.

Images